Processor structure and method for watchpoint of plural simultaneous unresolved branch evaluation

ABSTRACT

Time-out checkpoints are formed based on a predetermined time-out condition or interval since the last checkpoint was formed rather than forming a checkpoint to store current processor state based merely on decoded instruction attributes. Such time-out conditions may include the number of instructions issued or the number of clock cycles elapsed, for example. Time-out checkpointing limits the maximum number of instructions within a checkpoint boundary and bounds the time period for recovery from an exception condition. The processor can restore time-out based checkpointed state faster than an instruction decode based checkpoint technique in the event of an exception so long as the instruction window size is greater than the maximum number of instructions within a checkpoint boundary, and such method eliminates processor state restoration dependency on instruction window size. Time-out checkpoints may be implemented with conventional checkpoints, or in a novel logical and physical register rename map checkpointing technique. Timeout checkpoint formation may be used with conventional processor backup techniques as well as with a novel backtracking technique including processor backup and backstepping.

RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/398,299 for a PROCESSOR STRUCTURE AND METHOD FOR TRACKING INSTRUCTION STATUS TO MAINTAIN PRECISE STATE by inventors Gene W. Shen et al. filed Mar. 3, 1995, now abandoned, which is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/390,885 for a PROCESSOR STRUCTURE AND METHOD FOR TRACKING INSTRUCTION STATUS TO MAINTAIN PRECISE STATE by inventors Gene W. Shen et al. filed Feb. 14, 1995, now abandoned.

U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/388,602 for an INSTRUCTION FLOW CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR SUPERSCALER MICROPROCESSOR by inventor Takeshi Kitahara filed Feb. 14, 1995; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/388,389 for an ADDRESSING METHOD FOR EXECUTING LOAD INSTRUCTIONS OUT OF ORDER WITH RESPECT TO STOREINSTRUCTIONS by inventors Michael Simone and Michael Shebanow filed Feb. 14, 1995; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/388,606 for a METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENTLY WRITING RESULTS TO RENAMED REGISTERS by inventors DeForest Tovey, Michael Shebanow, John Gmuender filed Feb. 14, 1995; and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/388,364 for a METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COORDINATING THE USE OF PHYSICAL REGISTERS IN A MICROPROCESSOR by inventors DeForest Tovey, Michael Shebanow, John Gmuender filed Feb. 14, 1995, now abandoned, are each hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.

U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/390,885 entitled PROCESSOR STRUCTURE AND METHOD FOR TRACKING INSTRUCTION STATUS TO MAINTAIN PRECISE STATE filed Feb. 14, 1995 by inventors Gene W. Shen, John Szeto, Niteen A. Patkar and Michael C. Shebanow, now abandoned, U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/398,299 entitled PROCESSOR STRUCTURE AND METHOD FOR TRACKING INSTRUCTION STATUS TO MAINTAIN PRECISE STATE filed Mar. 3, 1995 by inventors Gene W. Sheri, John Szeto, Niteen A. Patkar and Michael C. Shebanow; now abandoned, U.S. patent application Ser. No.08/397,810 entitled PARALLEL ACCESS MICRO TLB TO SPEED UP ADDRESS TRANSLATION filed Mar. 3, 1995 by inventors Chih-Wei David Chang, Kioumars Dawallu, Joel F. Boney, Ming-Ying Li, and Jen-Hong Charles Chen; U.S. Pat. application Ser. No. 08/397,809 entitled LOOKASIDE BUFFER FOR ADDRESS TRANSLATION IN A COMPUTER SYSTEM filed Mar. 3, 1995, by inventors Leon Kuo-Liang Peng, Yolin Lih, and Chih-Wei David Chang; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/397,893 entitled RECLAMATION OF PROCESSOR RESOURCES IN A DATA PROCESSOR filed Mar. 3, 1995 by Michael C. Shebanow, Gene W. Shen, Ravi Swami, and Niteen Patkar, now abandoned; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/397,891 entitled METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING INSTRUCTIONS FROM ONES READY TO EXECUTE filed Mar. 3, 1995 by Michael C. Shebanow, John Gmuender, Michael A. Simone, John R.F.S. Szeto, Takumi Maruyama, and DeForest W. Tovey; now abandoned; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/397,911 endtied HARDWARE SUPPORT FOR FAST SOFTWARE EMULATION OF UNIMPLEMENTED INSTRUCTIONS filed Mar. 3, 1995 by Shalesh Thusoo, Farnad Sajjadian, Jaspal Kohli, and Niteen Patkar; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/398,284 entitled METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCELERATING CONTROL TRANSFER RETURNS filed on Mar. 3, 1995 by Aldro Katsuno, Sunil Savkar, and Michael C. Shebanow, now abandoned; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/398,066 entitled METHODS FOR UPDATING FETCH PROGRAM COUNTER filed Mar. 3, 1995 by Akira Katsuno, Niteen A. Patkar, Sunil Savkar, and Michael C. Shebanow, now abandoned; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/398,151 entitled METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RAPID EXECUTION OF CONTROL TRANSFER INSTRUCTIONS filed Mar. 3, 1995 by Sunil Savkar; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/397,910 entitled METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PRIORITIZING AND HANDLING ERRORS IN A COMPUTER SYSTEM filed Mar. 3, 1995 by Chih-Wei David Chang, Joel Fredrick Boney, and Jaspal Kohli; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/397,800 entitled METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERA TING A ZERO BIT STATUS FLAG IN A MICROPROCESSOR filed March 3, 1995 by Michael Simone; and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/397,912 entitled ECC PROTECTED MEMORY ORGANIZATION WITH PIPELINED READ-MODIFY-WRITE ACCESS filed on Mar. 3, 1995 by Chien Chen and Yizhi Lu, are each hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.

U.S. application Ser. No. 08/457,049, entitled METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROTATING ACTIVE INSTRUCTIONS IN A PARALLEL DATA PROCESSOR by inventors Sunil Savkar, Michael C. Shebanow, Gene W. Shen, and Farnad Sajjadian filed Jun. 1, 1995; U.S. application Ser. No. 08/456,746 entitled PROGRAMMABLE INSTRUCTION TRAP SYSTEM AND METHOD by inventors Sunil Savkar, Michael C. Shebanow, Gene W. Shen, and Farnad Sajjadian filed Jun. 1, 1995; are each hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.

U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/487,801 entitled PROCESSOR STRUCTURE AND METHOD FOR TRACKING INSTRUCTION STATUS TO MAINTAIN PRECISE STATE filed Jun. 7, 1995 by inventors Gene W. Shen, John Szeto, Niteen A. Patkar, and Michael C. Shebanow; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/478,025, entitled PROCESSOR STRUCTURE AND METHOD FOR AGGRESSIVELY SCHEDULING LONG LATENCY INSTRUCTIONS INCLUDING LOAD/STORE INSTRUCTIONS WHILE MAINTAINING PRECISE STATE filed Jun. 7, 1995 by inventors Gene W. Shen, John Szeto, Niteen A. Patkar, Michael C. Shebanow, and Michael A. Simone; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/483,95 entitled PROCESSOR STRUCTURE AND METHOD FOR MAINTAINING AND RESTORING PRECISE STATE AT ANY INSTRUCTION BOUNDARY filed Jun. 7, 1995 by inventors Gene W. Shen, John Szeto, Niteen A. Patkar, and Michael C. Shebanow; now U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/476,419 entitled PROCESSOR STRUCTURE AND METHOD FOR CHECKPOINTING INSTRUCTIONS TO MAINTAIN PRECISE STATE filed Jun. 7, 1995 by inventors Gene W. Shen, John Szeto, Niteen A. Patkar, and Michael C. Shebanow; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/473,223 entitled PROCESSOR STRUCTURE AND METHOD FOR A TIME-OUT CHECKPOINT filed Jun. 7, 1995 by inventors Gene W. Shen, John Szeto, Niteen A. Patkar, and Michael C. Shebanow; U.S. patent application Ser. No. entitled PROCESSOR STRUCTURE AND METHOD FOR TRACKING FLOATING-POINT EXCEPTIONS filed Jun. 7, 1995 by inventors Gene W. Shen, John Szeto, and Michael C. Shebanow; U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/472,394 entitled PROCESSOR STRUCTURE AND METHOD FOR RENAMABLE TRAP-STACK filed Jun. 7, 1995 by inventors Hideki Osone and Michael C. Shebanow; and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/482,073 entitled PROCESSOR STRUCTURE AND METHOD FOR WATCHPOINT FOR PLURAL SIMULTANEOUS UNRESOLVED BRANCH EVALUATION filed Jun. 7, 1995 by inventors Gene W. Shen, Michael C. Shebanow, Hideki Osone, and Takumi Maruyama, are each hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.

TECHNICAL FIELD

The field of the subject invention concerns apparatus, systems, and methods for increasing processor performance while maintaining precise state in a speculative out-of-order execution processor.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

With processors, control flow instructions (such as branch instructions), latency due to memory transactions, and instructions requiring multi-cycle operations often prevent the processor from sustaining peak instruction execution bandwidth because "bubbles" are introduced into the pipeline. Performance can be improved by implementing speculative out-of-order instruction execution to enhance performance. Conventionally, when an intermediate result from an instruction is not available for a subsequent instruction, the processor ceases execution, or "stalls" until that intermediate result is available.

Two techniques, speculative execution and out-of-order execution, help to maintain high execution bandwidth in modern processors. Speculative execution is a known technique in which, when a branch is encountered without the information from an earlier process step to select the appropriate branch, a prediction is made and instruction dispatch and execution proceeds based on that prediction. If the prediction later proves to be incorrect, the mispredicted instruction sequence must be undone using branch mispredict recovery. Speculative execution allows the processor to continue issuing and executing instructions. Known prediction schemes minimize the frequency of mispredicted execution in order to improve performance. However, maintaining precise state in a speculative machine is complicated and incurs undesirable overhead. Out-of-order execution is a technique that hides memory and multi-cycle instruction latency. In processors implementing out-of-order execution, instructions are dynamically reordered and executed in a different order than the sequential program order to reveal available instruction level parallelism.

A "precise exception" model has been shown to be an important feature for simplifying software resolution of exception conditions, but maintenance of precise exceptions is complicated in machines implementing speculative out-of-order execution. Machine state is generally processor specific and architectural state includes all control/status registers, data registers, address registers and all external memory state. For example, SPARC-V9 control/status registers are identified on pages 29-30 of the SPARC-V9 Architecture Manual. It is what the software and software programmer sees. Machine state is a super-set of architectural state that is processor specific and includes everything else about the state of the machine. A faulting instruction is an instruction which generates an exception. An exception is any situation or condition that tells the processor to stop and investigate the situation that caused the exception before proceeding. An exception need not be an error condition and includes interrupts for example. Execution traps may result from exceptions. In a processor implementing a precise exception model, a fault or exception does not modify architectural state. Architectural state has been modified for all instructions prior to the faulting instruction, but architectural state has not been modified for instructions after the faulting instruction. When a precise exception model is not provided, the software must identify the faulting instruction and then calculate a restart point for either retrying the faulting instruction or bypassing the faulting instruction and executing the next instruction.

Precise state maintenance techniques for short-pipelined, single-issue machines are known. Generally, a short-pipelined machine has fewer than about four or five stages including an instruction fetch, issue, execute, and write-back stage wherein state is modified. Single-issue implementations simplify recovery in the event of an exception or misprediction because the pipeline may be cleared without worrying about which instruction in a pipeline stage should be flushed. In these conventional techniques, any exception that may have occurred is detected prior to modifying architectural .state. When an exception is detected, the pipeline is flushed of instructions and any writeback of data, status, or results to architectural state is intentionally blocked to prevent modification of architectural state.

In speculative out-of-order superscalar (muleissue) implementations, maintaining precise state is much more difficult than for a single-issue machine. In such speculative out-of-order machines, instructions which generate errors may execute speculatively and method and structure must be provided to undo any architectural state modification which occur after the location of the fault. Also, exceptions may generally be detected in a different order than program order. Therefore, an out-of-order processor must be able to unscramble the exceptions and determine which instructions should be allowed to complete (and modify architectural state) and which instructions should be undone.

FIG. 1 shows a conventional approach using a re-order buffer for maintaining precise state in a speculative processor. The reorder buffer is implemented by a first-in/first-out stack that effectively introduces a temporal delay between instruction execution completion (when the result is available) and the time when machine state is modified as the result of execution completion. Precise state is maintained by preventing write back to memory of a mispredicted branch instruction, execution exception, or like condition. Precise state is maintained by preventing state modification while the instruction is still speculative rather than by restoring state to undo mispredicted speculative execution.

FIG. 2 shows a conventional approach for maintaining precise state in a speculative processor by storing state in a "checkpoint" prior to executing an instruction and later restoring state from the stored checkpoint information. In conventional checkpointing, every speculatively executed instruction that may result in modification of machine state is check pointed. Each processor has a set of state parameters, including for example, all control/status registers, data register values, and the like, that define the state of the machine. In order to restore a previous machine state, all of the state defining parameters must be stored so that they can be restored if and when the need arises, In conventional checkpointing techniques, every state defining parameter is typically stored for every instruction that may modify any one of the state defining parameters. For every checkpointed instruction, conventional checkpointing stores all state information that may be changed by any one of the checkpointed instructions, and not just the state that may be modified by that particular instruction about to be executed. For example, in a machine requiring 100 state parameters to define machine state, if execution of instruction "X" may modify only one control/status register, execution of that instruction will still require storing 100 state parameters, not just the one that may be modified by that instruction.

FIG. 3 shows the structure and content of an exemplary sequence of instructions and conventional checkpoints in diagrammatic fashion for purposes of illustration only and do not represent actual checkpoint data for any particular machine or CPU. Since conventional checkpoints are fixed size, this means that each checkpoint must be relatively large compared to the state actually modified by a particular instruction. Recovery using conventional checkpointing includes restoring state using a stored checkpoint closest to but prior to the faulting or mispredicted speculative instruction, backing up the program counter to just after the checkpointed instruction, and re-executing instructions from the checkpointed instruction forward.

Checkpointing, re-order buffers, history buffers, and the use of a future file have been described as ways to manage out-of-order execution and maintain precise state in some circumstances. Conventional Checkpointing which permits restoration of machine state at a checkpoint boundary, but not at an arbitrary instruction boundary, is described by Hwu and Patt (W. Hwu and Y. N. Patt, "Checkpoint Repair for High Performance Out-of-order Execution Machines", Proceedings of the 14th Annual Symposium on Computer Architecture, (June 1987), pp. 18-26). Methods of implementing precise interruptions in pipelined RISC processors are described by Wang and Emnett ("Implementing Precise Interruptions in Pipelined RISC Processors", IEEE Micro, August 1993, pp.36-43). Methods of implementing precise interrupts in pipelined processors are also described by Smith and Pleszkun (J. E. Smith and A. R. Pleszkyn, "Implementation of Precise Interrupts in Pipelined Processors.", Proceedings of the 12th Annual International Symposium on Computer Architecture, (June 1985), pp. 36-44). An overview of conventional techniques for designing high-performance superscalar microprocessors is provided by Mike Johnson (M. Johnson [a.k.a. William Johnson], SuperScalar Microprocessor Design, Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N.J. 07632, 1991, ISBN 0-1.3-875634-1 .). Each of these references are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.

Although at least some of these techniques improve performance, they are not entirely satisfactory because they either limit the degree of speculation or they allow only coarse machine state restoration not instruction level machine state restoration. Conventional re-order buffer techniques limit the degree of speculation because the re-order buffer length is linear with respect to the degree of speculation supported. That is, for each instruction that may have to be undone, the instruction execution result must be stored in the re-order buffer. For example, if the machine permits sixty-four outstanding and potentially speculative instructions, the re-order buffer must contain at least sixty-four locations for storing results. In conventional checkpointing, the number of checkpoints checkpointed are typically fewer than the number of outstanding instructions in the machine, but the amount of data stored in each checkpoint is very large (the entire state of the machine at the time). The checkpoint storage requirements place a burden on processor chip substrate area. Ideally, a scheme for maintaining precise state should be scalable, at a linear or lower order relationship (e.g. logarithmic) to larger numbers of concurrently outstanding speculative instructions. Reorder buffer entry storage areas must have sufficient width to store the data and these techniques also require associative look-up to all entries. This can be difficult for very large reorder buffers.

Furthermore, conventional methods of restoring precise state are incomplete in some environments. For example, where an instruction executed as the result of a speculative branch modifies the state of an external "dumb" device, where restoration of state typically involves restoring state at a checkpoint boundary prior to the point of the modification to the external device and then forward re-execution of non-faulting instructions including the instruction that modifies the external device. In such cases re-executing the faulting instruction alone will not undo the effect of the change in the state of the external device and the re-execution of the non-faulting instructions between the point where state is restored and the faulting instruction causes further problems.

Conventional checkpointing saves machine state at a limited number of different points in the instruction stream and restores the checkpointed architectural state in order to recover from branch mispredictions or execution errors. Conventional checkpointing does not checkpoint each instruction. Conventional checkpointing can restore machine state only at checkpoint boundaries, that is at the instruction for which a checkpoint was established. When a fault or execution error occurs, the checkpointed state is restored by known techniques, thereby in effect "undoing" all instructions subsequent to the checkpoint, and thus including the faulting instruction(s). Then the instructions are re-executed serially forward, for example in a single-issue mode, from the checkpointed instruction to reach the faulting instruction.

This conventional checkpointing technique allows speculative execution but is disadvantageous in many respects. For example, it does not provide robust exception recovery. On intermittent errors, conventional backup of the machine to the checkpoint prior to the exception creating instruction and then re-execution of the instructions following the checkpoint may not result in deterministic behavior and may compound machine state disruption by propagating erroneously altered state in the re-executed instructions. Conventional checkpointing and machine backup procedures do not attempt to minimize instruction re-execution. Furthermore, catastrophic machine errors such as hardware failures and machine time-outs may deadlock the processor if all of the instructions between the restored checkpointed instruction and the instruction causing the exception are re-executed.

Conventional "re-order buffers" manage speculative instructions in a re-order buffer which is a first-in-first-out (FIFO) memory structure of a predefined size. When an instruction completes execution, data value results from the execution are written into the re-order buffer and as they move through the buffer and emerge at the top, the data values are written from the re-order buffer into a register file. The size of the re-order buffer effectively defines the delay between completion of execution of the instruction and permanent modification of architectural state. Once the data values are written to the register they cannot be undone. "Associative lookup," a procedure by which entries in the re-order buffers are associated with entries in the register file, is discussed in M. Johnson, Superscalar Microprocessor Design at page 49 et seq.

Re-order buffer schemes have at least three limitations. First, in conventional re-order buffer schemes, only the results of instruction execution are saved in the re-order buffer and the Program Counter (PC) values are not saved. Therefore, any branch mispredict recovery using re-order buffers requires the additional steps of PC reconstruction, instruction fetch, and instruction issue. As a result, conventional recovery from a branch mispredict using re-order buffers is delayed.

Second, re-order buffers generally only allow speculative execution of a limited mix of instructions. For example, traps detected during the instruction issue stage (issue traps) may not be speculatively executed using re-order buffers because they generally involve control register updates. Re-order buffer techniques do not support speculative execution of an instruction involving control register updates. The inability to speculatively enter issue traps in certain instruction set architectures (e.g. "spill/fill" traps in the Sun Microsystems SPARC architecture) can impose significant performance limitations.

Third, re-order buffer size is generally a direct linear function of the number of outstanding instructions allowed in the processor. For example, in the processor that allows sixty-four outstanding instructions a reorder buffer having sixty-four entries would be required. Allocating the large number of buffer registers within the processor can be prohibitive, especially in dataflow processors where large active instruction windows, that is a relatively large number of concurrently outstanding instructions allow improved extraction of instruction level parallelism. Dataflow processors are processors where the order of instruction execution is determined by the operand or data availability, rather than based on incrementing the program counter as in conventional non-data flow processors.

Future files are a modification of the re-order buffer technique that avoids the associative lookup problem in the reorder buffer. Future Files are described in M. Johnson's Superscalar Microprocessor Design at pages 94-95. History buffers are a method and structure proposed for implementing precise interrupts in a pipelined scalar processor with out-of-order completion and is described in M. Johnson's Superscalar Microprocessor Design at pages 91-92.

"The SPARC Architecture Manual", Version 9, by D. Weaver and T. Germond, Englewood Cliffs (1994), which is hereby explicitly incorporated by reference in its entirety, describes a particular type of out-of-order speculative execution processor. The SPARC V9 architecture requires a Floating-Point State Register (FSR). The FSR contains 3 fields, the FSR₋₋ accrued₋₋ exception (FSR.aexc) field, the FSR₋₋ current₋₋ exception (FSR.cexc) field, and the FSR₋₋ floating₋₋ point₋₋ trap₋₋ type (FSR.ftt) field, which are updated when a floating point exception occurs and are used by a trap handling routine for handling a trap caused by the floating point exception. The updating of these fields is difficult in an out-of-order execution processor because instructions execute and complete in a different order than program order. Since these fields need to be updated or appear to be updated as if instructions are issued and executed in program order, an apparatus and corresponding method is required to track these exceptions and correctly update the FSR register.

For data processors which can execute instructions speculatively, branch direction (taken or not-taken), or branch address (target address or address next to the branch instruction) can be predicted before they are resolved. Later, if these predictions turn out to be wrong, the processor backs up to the previous state and re-starts executing instructions in the correct branch stream. However, most superscalar processors available in the market can evaluate only one branch per cycle to check whether or not branch predictions are correct. But, multiple predicted branches are often ready to evaluate in one cycle. Thus, branch evaluations which could otherwise be performed need to be delayed. Delaying branch evaluations affects the processor performance significantly.

Furthermore, in conventional speculative execution processors, when a trap occurs, the processor has to wait until all predicted branches have been resolved to make sure that the trap is real and not speculative. The easiest way for a processor to make sure that a trap is real is to synchronize the processor (i.e., execute and complete all instructions issued or to the occurrence of the trap condition) before taking the trap. However, doing so for traps that occur frequently degrades the performance of the processor. This is especially true in the SPARC-V9 architecture where spill/fill issue traps and software traps (Tcc instructions) often occur. This problem needs to be resolved in order to increase processor performance.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The foregoing problems are solved by a data processor and associated method for simultaneously monitoring execution results of a plurality of speculatively issued predicted instructions. The inventive structure and method provides a watchpoint unit having a plurality of watchpoint registers for storing watchpoint data coupled to receive execution result signals from one or more execution units within the processor. A watchpoint register for storing watchpoint data including a predicted condition data result for each the speculatively issued predicted instruction is allocated at the time the instruction is issued. The predicted condition data result identifies the predicted value of a condition on which the control flow transfer direction of the speculatively issued instruction depends and on the basis of which the speculatively issued predicted instruction was speculatively issued. The watchpoint unit monitors execution result signals for the speculatively issued predicted instructions that are transmitted over data forward buss(es) from the execution unit(s) and detects occurrence of predetermined events based on the stored watchpoint data and execution result signals including an actual known condition data result signal and predetermined rules that define whether the actual condition codes match the predicted condition codes. The watch point data stored in the watch point register for one of the speculatively issued predicted instructions is compared with the result signals arriving over the data forward busses pertaining to the speculatively issued instruction to determine if the signals match or do not match; a match indicating that the speculatively issued predicted instruction was correctly predicted and a non-match indicating that the speculatively issued predicted instruction was mispredicted. When a misprediction is identified, then the processor is recovered to an earlier state so that instructions executed on the basis of the misprediction are undone. Aspects of the invention provide structure and method for simultaneously grabbing condition code data from the execution units including the ability to monitor multiple execution units and multiple speculatively issued instructions simultaneously, including multiple predicted branch or jump-and-link instructions; structure and method for grabbing plural Condition-Code data or calculated jump-and-link addresses for which predicted branch or jump-and-link instructions are waiting by watching data forward buses from execution units simultaneously; structure and method for generating plural misprediction signals of branch or jump-and-link instructions simultaneously; structure and method for storing alternate branch address or predicted jump-and-link address in one shared storage region; structure and method for sending the correct branch address or jump-and-link address for instruction fetch after a misprediction is detected as part of processor recovery; and structure and method for speeding up critical paths, by splitting up the task of condition code tag comparison and grabbing. In one embodiment of the inventive structure and method these several aspects are advantageoulsy combined to improve overall processor performance.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 shows a conventional approach using a re-order buffer for maintaining precise state in a speculative processor.

FIG. 2 shows a conventional approach for maintaining precise state in a speculative processor by storing state in a checkpoint pdor to executing an instructions and later restoring state from the stored checkpoint information.

FIG. 3 shows the structure and content of an exemplary sequence of instructions and conventional checkpoints in diagrammatic fashion for purposes of illustration only and do not represent actual checkpoint data for any particular machine,

FIG. 4 is a top level functional block diagram of an embodiment of the inventive data processor including a central processing unit.

FIG. 5 shows the stages of an embodiment of the novel instruction pipeline of the CPU for some typical instruction types.

FIG. 6 shows an exemplary Branch Block (BRB) of the inventive CPU which includes an instruction prefetch and cache unit and a fetch unit.

FIG. 7 shows an exemplary Issue Block (ISB) including an Issue Unit (ISU), a Precise State Unit (PSU), a Freelist Unit, and a Control Register File.

FIG. 8 shows exemplary signals received by the Issue Unit from the register renaming Freelist Unit and used to implement the inventive register renaming.

FIG. 9 shows an embodiment of the Precise State Unit (PSU).

FIG. 10 shows a functional block diagram of components of an embodiment of the Issue/Commit/Reclaim Unit (ICRU) and input and output signals associated with its operation.

FIG. 11 shows diagrammatic illustrations of embodiments of the Active Instruction Data Structure and Memory Instruction Data Structure for storing instruction status information and various pointers associated with a first set of exemplary data stored in the data structures.

FIG. 12 shows an exemplary Status Control Logic Unit including some structural components of A-Ring Bit Set/Clear Logic.

FIG. 13 is a flow-chart of an embodiment of the inventive method of using instruction tags to track status and maintain precise state.

FIG. 14 is a diagrammatic flow-chart of an embodiment of the inventive method for tracking instruction status to maintain precise state.

FIG. 15a-15b are a flow-chart diagram of the method for writing staus information in the Active Instruction Ring and Memory Instruction Ring according to an embodiment of the inventive method for tracking instruction status to maintain precise state.

FIG. 16 shows an embodiment of the Register File and Rename Unit (RFRN) including a physical register file that includes physical registers.

FIG. 17 shows an embodiment of the Control Register the associated with register renaming.

FIG. 18 shows an embodiment of the Resource Reclaim File (RRF).

FIG. 19 illustrates the inventive register renaming method.

FIG. 20 is a diagrammatic flow-chart of an embodiment of the inventive method for maintaining precise state including instruction issue, deactivation, commit, and retirement.

FIG. 21 shows diagrammatic illustrations of embodiments of the Active Instruction Data Structure and Memory Instruction Data Structure for storing instruction status information and various pointers associated with a second set of exemplary data stored in the data structures.

FIG. 22 shows a functional block diagram of Load/Store Unit (LSU) within the Data Forward Block of the CPU.

FIG. 23 is a flow-chart of an embodiment of the inventive method for aggressively scheduling long latency instructions including load/store instructions while maintaining precise state.

FIG. 24 is a functional block diagram of Checkpoint Unit.

FIG. 25 is a functional Block diagram of Watchpoint Unit.

FIG. 26 is a diagrammatic flow-chart of an embodiment of the inventive method for checkpointing including an optional checkpointing enhancement for forming a time-out checkpoint.

FIG. 27 shows a functional block diagram of the major functional blocks within an embodiment of the Watchpoint Unit.

FIG. 28 shows an embodiment of the Watchpoint Unit showing particular embodiments of the Condition Code grabbing Logic, Evaluation logic, Watchpoint Elements Storage and Control Unit, and Target RAM.

FIG. 29 shows a schematic portion of an embodiment of Watchpoint, including Current Matching Logic, Array Matching Logic, and Condition Code Select Logic which includes Evaluation Ready and Evaluate Condition Code Logic.

FIG. 30 shows an exemplary timing chart associated with branch prediction and evaluation.

FIG. 31 shows structural detail associated with an embodiment of the Current Match Logic and Array Match Logic.

FIG. 32a-32b show structural detail associated with an embodiment of the Condition Code Select Logic.

FIG. 33 shows structural detail associated with an embodiment of the Evaluation Ready Logic.

FIG. 34 shows structural detail associated with an embodiment of the Evaluation True Logic.

FIG. 35 shows structural detail associated with an embodiment of the TARGET-RAM and Jump-Link Instruction Evaluation Logic.

FIG. 36 is a diagrammatic flow-chart of an embodiment of the inventive Watchpoint method for plural simultaneous unresolved branch evaluation.

FIG. 37 is schematic representation of an embodiment of the Floating-Point Exception (FPEXCEP) Data Structure.

FIG. 38 show signal interfaces to the exemplary Floating-Point Exception Ring data structure.

FIG. 39 shows the floating point exception unit including the RD and AEXC logic.

FIG. 40 is a diagrammatic representation of an embodiment of the Backtrack Unit which includes Back-up and Backstep components.

FIG. 41 is a diagrammatic flow-chart of an embodiment of the inventive method for maintaining and restoring precise state at any instruction boundary including the backup and backstep procedures.

FIG. 42a-42f show the manner in which the logical to physical mappings are restored in a register rename file.

FIG. 43 provides an illustrative example of a machine backtrack including a single machine backup to a checkpoint boundary followed by two machine backsteps to an instruction boundary.

FIG. 44 shows an exemplary Priority Logic and State Machine (PLSM).

FIG. 45 shows an exemplary Trap Stack Unit.

FIG. 46 shows an embodiment of Freelist Logic for storing a list of the storage elements of the Trap Stack.

FIG. 47 shows exemplary Rename Map Logic.

FIG. 48 shows an exemplary Trap-Stack RRF.

FIG. 49 shows the Trap Stack Checkpoint storage unit.

FIG. 50 shows Watchpoint WP₋₋ ACTIVE₋₋ VEC and WP₋₋ MISPRED Logic.

FIG. 51 shows Trap Stack Backup Example.

FIG. 52 shows XICC Write Logic.

FIG. 53 shows XICC Grabbing Logic and Array Later Match Logic.

FIG. 54 shows Wait For Condition Code Logic.

DESCRIPTION OF SPECIFIC EMBODIMENTS

FIG. 4 is a top level functional block diagram of a data processor 50. The data processor includes a novel out-of-order speculative execution (superscalar) central processing unit (CPU) 51. The exemplary CPU is capable of executing the SPARC-V9 instruction set described in the SPARC-V9 Architecture Manual. "The SPARC Architecture Manual", Version 9, by D. Weaver and T. Germond, Englewood Cliffs (1994), which is hereby explicitly incorporated by reference. However, those skilled in the art will recognize that the novel design and methods described herein are not limited to the SPARC-V9 architecture.

Indeed, CPU 51 employs novel designs and methods for increasing throughput while maintaining precise machine state which are applicable to all data processors. Specifically, it employs (1) a novel design and method for tracking instructions to monitor and recover processor resources and state; (2) a novel design and method for aggressively scheduling long latency instructions such as load/store instructions; (3) a novel design and method for checkpointing machine state; and (4) a novel design and method for restoring machine state after detection of an exception or misprediction.

An outline of the Description of Specific Embodiments Section of this Specification is provided here for convenient reference. The topical headers in this Specification are provided for convenient reference only, and are not to be interpreted as limiting the applicability of the disclosure provided in that section to any particular aspect or embodiment of the invention.

I. CPU OPERATION OVERVIEW

II. TRACKING INSTRUCTIONS

A. Instruction Fetch

B. Instruction Issue

1. Instruction Issue Overview

2. Instruction Serial Number Allocation and Instruction Status Storage

a. Instruction Issue-Commit-Reclaim Unit (ICRU)

b. Instruction Issue Related Pointers and Pointer Maintenance During Issue Stage

3. Register Renaming

4. Dispatch to Reservation Stations

C. Instruction Execution and Completion

D. PSU Participation in the Instruction Execution Stage

E. Instruction Commitment

F. Instruction Retirement and Resource Recovery

1. Updates to RRF and Rename Maps at Instruction Commitment and Retirement

2. Reading RRF at Instruction Retirement

3. Precise State Maintenance Using Pointers

III. AGGRESSIVE LONG LATENCY (LOAD/STORE) INSTRUCTION SCHEDULING

A. Memory Instruction Status Information Storage

B. NMCSN and PBSN Pointers for Tracking and Scheduling Long-Latency Information

C. Advancing NMCSN

D. Load-Store Unit (LSU) within Data Flow Block

1. Identifying In-Range Memory Referencing (long Latency) instructions

2. Enhancement to the Basic Structure and Method For Aggressive Long Latency (Load/Store) Instruction Scheduling

IV. CHECKPOINTING

A. Structure of Checkpoint Allocation Register

B. Checkpoint Allocation

C. Checkpoint Retirement

D. Checkpoint Maintenance On Machine Backup

E. Timeout Checkpoint Enhancement

F. Maintaining and Restoring Precise State at Any Instruction Boundary

G. Method of Syncing Machine for Predetermined Instructions to Reduce amount of Checkpointed Data

H. Method of Checkpointing Register Rename Map to reduce amount of Checkpointed Data

V. RECOVERY FROM MISPREDICTS AND EXCEPTIONS

A. Misprediction Detection with Watchpoint for Simultaneous Plural Unresolved Branch/Jump-and-Link Instruction Evaluation

1. Activation of Watchpoint Elements

2. Watchpoint Grabbing of CC Data Directly from Data Forward Busses

3. Examples of Watchpoint Operation

4. Evaluation of Branch Instructions

5. Evaluation of JUMP-LINK (JMPL) Instructions

B. Exception Detection

1. Detecting Issue Traps

2. Detecting Execution Traps

C. Recovery by Backtracking the Processor to an Earlier State

1. Processor Backup to a Checkpoint Boundary

2. Mispredicted Instruction, RED Mode, and Execution Trap Initiated Backup

3. Processor Backstep to Any Instruction Boundary

D. Priority Logic and State Machine Operation During Exception & Misprediction Recovery

E. Handling of Traps with Trap Stack

I. CPU OPERATION OVERVIEW

CPU 51 fetches instructions from a level one (L1) instruction cache 52 and stores data in and retrieves data from a level one (L1) data cache 53. The L1 instruction and data caches may be physically positioned on the same chip/substrate as the CPU 51 or may be assembled on a different chip/substrate.

The CPU also interacts with a memory management control unit (MMU) 54 to determine the overall status of the data processor 50. Specifically, the MMU retrieves instructions from the external memory 56, stores data in and retrieves data from the external memory 56, receives data from and outputs data to the external I/O devices 57, provides diagnostic information to and receives diagnostic information from the external diagnostic processor 58, the CPU 51, and the caches 52 and 53, performs data address translations, and stores and tracks memory status information.

FIG. 5 shows the stages (and associated machine cycles) of the novel instruction pipeline of the CPU 51 for some typical instruction types, including predicted program control instructions, fixed and floating point instructions, and load/store instructions. To implement this pipeline, the CPU 51 includes a branch block (BRB) 59, an issue block (ISB) 61, and a data flow block (DFB) 62, as shown in FIG. 4.

Referring to FIGS. 4 and 5, the BRB 59 fetches instructions during the fetch stage and provides these instructions to the ISB 61. The BRB 59 makes target address predictions and branch taken or not taken predictions for various typos of program control instructions. Thus, it is capable of speculatively fetching instructions during the fetch stage.

The ISB 61 issues the fetched instructions in predicted program counter (PC) order during the issue stage because the instructions may have been speculatively fetched. It also forms checkpoints of the machine state of the CPU 51 during the issue stage for instructions that fall at predefined intervals and for predefined types of issued instructions including program control instructions for which predictions were made by the BRB 59.

The BRB 59 executes and completes nop and predicted program control instructions in the same stage as which they are issued by the ISB 61. However, the DFB 62 executes and completes issued fixed point and floating point instructions as soon as the resources they require become available. Moreover, the DFB 62 aggressively schedules issued load/store instructions for execution when the resources they require are available and in such way that when they are executed and completed they do not have to be undone in the case of an exception (e.g., issue trap, execution trap, or interrupt) or program control misprediction. Thus, although some fixed point, floating point, and load/store instructions may have an earlier issue stage than others, they will have later execute and complete stages since the resources they require may not have become available yet. Moreover, they may have been speculatively executed and completed since they may have been speculatively fetched by the BRB 59 based on an earlier program control prediction by the BRB 59. In other words, instructions issued to the DFB 62 may be executed and completed out of predicted PC order.

When an instruction completes without an error occurring (e.g., issue trap, execution trap, or mispredict), it is then deactivated by the ISB 61 in the deactivate stage. Since instructions may complete out of predicted PC order, they may also be deactivated out of predicted PC order.

Deactivated instructions are then committed by the ISB 61 in actual PC order during the commit stage. This is true because a deactivated instruction may not be committed unless all preceding issued instructions were committed. As a result, once an instruction is committed, it may not be undone in the case of an exception or misprediction. This means that the actual PC order up to this point is correct and that the instruction has been committed in the actual PC order. Moreover, when an instruction for which a checkpoint was formed is committed, then the preceding checkpoint can be retired.

When an instruction is committed, it is then retired by the ISB 61 in actual PC order in the retire stage. After an instruction (s retired, the resources allocated to it are reclaimed and may be re-allocated to other instructions when they are issued.

The ISB 61 handles recovery from an exception or program control misprediction that occurs at some point during the pipeline. Thus, if a program control misprediction occurs, then the ISB 61 backs up the CPU 51 to the checkpoint formed when the faurdng program control instruction was issued. Similarly, if an execution trap occurs, then the ISB 61 first backs up the CPU 51 to the earliest checkpoint formed after the faulting instruction was issued, if such a checkpoint has been formed, and/or backsteps the CPU 51 to the faulting instruction. In backing up to a checkpoint and/or backstepping, the CPU 51 is returned to the correct machine state that existed just prior to the issuance and execution of the faulting instruction.

If the ISB 61 has backed up to a faulting instruction that caused a program control misprediction, then the BRB 59 begins fetching instructions with the correct program counter value and the correct machine state. But, if the ISB 61 has backed up and/or backstepped to an instruction that caused an execution trap, it provides the BRB 59 with the target program counter value for the appropriate trap handling routine. The trap handling routine then handles the trap and returns the program counter value of the faulting instruction or the next program counter value to the BRB 59 for fetching the next instruction. The program counter of the faulting instruction is returned if the trap handling routine Instructs the CPU 51 to fetch the faulting instruction and retry issuing and executing it. But, the next program counter value is returned if the trap handling routine instructs the CPU 51 to fetch the next instructions after the faulting instruction so as to skip issuing and executing the faulting instruction.

II. TRACKING INSTRUCTIONS

As was alluded to earlier, the CPU 51 employs a novel design and method for tracking instructions in the instruction pipeline of the CPU 51. In order to implement this design and method, the pipeline includes the fetch, issue, execute, complete, deactivate, commit, and retire stages shown in FIG. 5 and discussed briefly earlier.

A. Instruction Fetch

Referring again to FIG. 4, the BRB 59 fetches instructions during the fetch stage and provides them to the ISB 61. As shown in FIG. 6, the BRB 59 includes an instruction prefetch and cache unit (IPCU) 100 and a fetch unit 102.

The IPCU 100 can retrieve four instructions (INSETS) from the level one (L1) instruction cache 52 at a time. The retrieved instructions are recorded by the instruction recoder 101 of the IPCU 100 to a format more suitable for use by the BRB 59, ISB 61, and DFB 62. In alternative embodiments, the IPCU 100 could be implemented to retrieve more or less than four instructions at a time.

The fetch unit 102 includes program counter (PC) logic 106 to compute a fetch program counter (FPC) value, an architectural program counter (APC) value, and a next architectural program counter (NAPC) value. The FPC, APC, and NAPC values computed each machine cycle are respectively stored in the FPC, APC, and NAPC registers 112-114 of the PC logic. The current FPC value in the FPC register points to the instructions being fetched in the current machine cycle while the current APC and NAPC values in the APC and NAPC registers 113 and 114 point b the first and next instructions which are available to be issued by the ISB in the current machine cycle and which were fetched in a previous machine cycle.

In response to the FPC value, four instructions (F₋₋ INSTs) at a time are fetched by the IPCU 100. In alternative embodiments, it could be implemented to fetch more or less than four instructions at a time.

For each FPC value, the branch history table 104 contains a branch prediction field (BRP) for each instruction fetched with the FPC value. Thus, each of the BRP fields corresponds to one of the instructions fetched with that FPC value. If any of the fetched instructions are conditional branch instructions, such as the SPARC-V9 BPcc, Bicc, BPr, FBfcc, and FBPfcc instructions, then their corresponding BRP fields identify whether the branch should be predicted taken or not taken in the subsequent issue, execute, and complete stage of the branch instruction. The branch history table 104 outputs the BRP fields for the fetched instructions in response to the FPC value. The BRP fields are then appended to the corresponding fetched instructions (F₋₋ INSTs) by the fetch unit 102 to provide composite instructions which are received by the fetch rotation register 110.

The fetch register has four latches for holding four instructions at a time. The latches define an issue window with four slots (0-3) containing, in predicted PC order, the next four instructions that can be issued by the ISU 200. However, some of the instructions held by the fetch register during the previous machine may have not been issued by the ISU 200 because of issue constraints such as those described shortly. To make sure that fetched instructions will be issued in predicted PC order, the ISU 200 generates fetch register control (FCH₋₋ REG₋₋ CNTRL) signals which control the fetch register to place the instructions that weren't issued in the last machine cycle in the appropriate latches so that they are in predicted PC order in the issue window and can therefore be issued in predicted PC order by the ISU 200. Moreover, in response to the FCH₋₋ REG₋₋ CNTRL signals, the fetch register places in the remaining latches those of the just fetched instructions that come next in predicted PC order.

In alternative embodiments, the fetch register could be implemented to store more or less than four instructions at a time. Moreover, although the exemplary CPU 51 has been described with one fetch register located in the fetch unit 102, a fetch register of the type just described could be used at each block in the CPU that performs decoding. And, the fetch registers could be placed in these blocks so that initial decoding takes place during the fetch cycle prior to the decoded instructions being stored in the fetch registers with the remainder of the decoding taking in the issue stage.

B. Instruction Issue

1. Instruction Issue Overview

The ISB 61 is responsible for issuing fetched instructions during each issue stage. As shown in FIG. 7, the ISB 61 includes an issue unit (ISU) 200, a precise state unit (PSU) 300, a freelist unit 700, and a contr register the 800. During each issue stage, the ISU 200 receives four instructions (F₋₋ INSTs₋₋ BRPs) at a time from the fetch register 110 of the BRB 59. In response, it decodes them to determine how many of them to issue based on various issue constraints, such as those described next.

Since the fetch register 110 provides four instructions at a time to the ISU 200 during each issue stage, the ISU 200 can issue up to four instructions during each issue stage. But, it can only issue the four instructions in the issue window of each issue stage in predicted PC order. Therefore, if any other issue constraints require flat one of the instructions in the current issue window cannot be issued, then only those of the instructions in the issue window slots prior to this instruction can be issued during the current issue stage. Since, in alternative embodiments, the fetch register 110 may be constructed to provide to the ISU 200 more or less than four instructions per issue stage, the ISU 200 may be constructed to issue up to more or less than four instructions per issue stage. Referring to FIG. 8, the FPU 600, FXU 601, FXAGU 602, and LSU 603 have reservation stations or queues for storing instruction data dispatched to them for issued instructions. However, during the issue stage, some of the reservation stations may not have enough storage elements or entries available to store dispatched instruction data. Thus, the FPU 600, FXU 601, FXAGU 602, and LSU 603 output ENTRIES₋₋ AVAIL signals that respectively indicate how many entries are available in the reservation stations of the FPU 600, FXU 601, FXAGU 602, and LSU 603 to receive dispatched instruction data. As a result, the ISU 200 issues floating point, fixed point, and load store instructions based on how many entries are available as indicated by the ENTRIES₋₋ AVAIL signals.

Moreover, in the exemplary CPU 51, the FXU 601 is the only execution unit in the DFB 62 that executes program control, multiply/divide, and control register read/write instructions that involve fixed point data computations. Thus, in this case, the ISU 200 issues these kinds of instructions for execution by the FXU 601. In alternative embodiments, the FXAGU 602 may also be configured to execute program control, multiply/divide, and control register read/write instructions that involve fixed point data. In this case, the ISU 200 would also issue these kinds of instructions for execution by the FXAGU 602. Moreover, each of the execution units 600-603 may comprise one or more functional units, with each functional unit capable of executing or performing an issued instruction. Thus, the number of instructions that can be issued depends on the number of functional units within each execution unit. Referring again to FIG. 7, the PSU 300 may also impose issue constraints on the issuing of instructions by the ISU 200. The PSU 300 can output an ISSUE₋₋ KILL signal that identifies which, if any, of the instructions received from the fetch register 110 should not be issued during the current issue stage. As will be explained in greater detail later, the ISSUE₋₋ KILL signal is asserted when the PSU 300 is backing up or backstepping to a faulting instruction after an exception has been detected or during the execution, completion, deactivation, and retirement of a syncing instruction which is described next.

For particular types of instructions, the ISU 200 makes certain that the CPU 51 is synced (synchronized) prior to issuing one of these-syncing (synchronizing) instructions. The CPU 51 is synced for a particular instruction when all of the instructions preceding it have been issued, executed, completed, deactivated, and retired. Thus, when the ISU 200 determines that one of the instructions received from the fetch register 110 is a syndng instruction, it waits until it has issued the instructions that are in the issue window slots ahead of it and until it receives a MACHINE₋₋ SYNC signal from the PSU 300 indicating that the CPU 51 has been synced. When this occurs, the instruction is in the slot of the issue window for the instruction with the earliest PC value (i.e., slot 0) and the ISU 200 will only issue it. Although the exemplary CPU 51 implements the previously described method of syncing machine state for particular instruction types, an alternative technique would allow issue of syncing instructions after commitment of the previous instruction since a committed instruction is guaranteed to be non-speculative.

The ISU 200 also detects issue traps, such as those described in the SPARC-V9 Architecture Manual, which effect issuing of instructions. The ISU 200 receives control register (CNTRL₋₋ REG) fields from the control register file 800 and decodes the instructions (F₋₋ INSTs₋₋ BRPs) received from the fetch register 110 to detect whether certain types of issue traps have occurred during an issue stage. In an embodiment based on the SPARC-V9 architecture, this is done in accordance with the SPARC-V Architecture Manual. Moreover, other types of issue traps do not require register control and are taken and detected based on the instruction opcode decoded by the ISU 200.

Only the issue trap caused by the instruction in the earliest issue window slot will be taken. Therefore, when one or more issue traps are detected, only the instructions in the issue window slots prior to the slot of the issue trap causing instruction in the earliest slot can be issued by the ISU 200. Moreover, for issue traps that occur often, the CPU 51 will be synced in the manner described earlier so that the issue trap is not taken speculatively. In alternative embodiment, the CPU 51 could be configured to allow the issue traps to only occur in slot 0 so as to reduce and simplify logic.

During each issue stage, the ISU 200 assigns (allocates) a serial number to each instruction that is issued and dispatches these serial numbers (SNs) to the DFB 62. As will be described in greater detail later, the PSU 300 keeps track of the issued instructions using the allocated serial numbers. Moreover, in the exemplary CPU 51, it can only keep track of a predetermined number of issued but not yet retired instructions at any one time. But, as issued instructions are retired, their serial numbers become available. Thus, the PSU 300 provides the ISU 200 with SN₋₋ AVAIL signals that include a signal to indicate how many serial numbers are available for the current issue stage and signals to contain these available serial numbers. If, during the current issue stage, the SN₋₋ AVAIL signals indicate that the number of serial numbers currently available are less than the number of instructions that can be issued, then only those instructions in the earliest slots for which serial numbers can be allocated are actually issued.

Also during the issue stage, the ISU 200 determines whether checkpoints of the machine state of the CPU 51 should be formed for any of the instructions. As will be described in greater detail later, checkpoints will be formed for certain types of instructions and at predetermined issue stage intervals. Thus, when the ISU 200 determines that any of the instructions it will issue require a checkpoint and/or the PSU 300 indicates with the TIMEOUT₋₋ CHKPT signal that a predetermined number of issue stages have occurred since the last issue stage in which a checkpoint was formed, the ISU 200 generates a DO₋₋ CHKPT signal instructing the PSU 300, control register file 800, the BRB 59, and the DFB 62 to form checkpoints of the machine state of the CPU 51.

Furthermore, the ISU 200 assigns a checkpoint number to each of the instructions that is issued and dispatches these checkpoint numbers (CHKPT₋₋ Ns) to the DFB 62. In doing so, each instruction for which a checkpoint is to be formed is assigned a new checkpoint number while the instructions for which a checkpoint is not formed are assigned the checkpoint number of the previous checkpoint. The PSU 300 keeps track of the formed checkpoints using the assigned checkpoint numbers.

As with assigned serial numbers, the PSU 300 can only keep track of a predetermined number of formed but not yet retired checkpoints at any one time. However, since checkpoint numbers become available as checkpoints are retired, the PSU 300 provides the ISU 200 with CHKPT₋₋ AVAIL signals that include a signal that indicates how many checkpoint numbers are available for the current issue stage and signals that contain the available checkpoint numbers. Thus, when the CHKPT₋₋ AVAIL signals indicate that the number of new checkpoint numbers currently available are less than the number of instructions that require a new checkpoint to be formed, only those of the instructions in the earliest issue window slots for which new checkpoint numbers can be assigned are actually issued.

Furthermore, the CPU 51 may be configured to only form a predetermined number of checkpoints per issue stage. Thus, for example, if the CPU 51 can only form one checkpoint per issue stage and there are two instructions in an issue window that require a checkpoint to be formed, the ISU 200 will only issue the instruction which is in the earliest slot during the current issue stage and will issue the other instruction in another issue stage.

As will be discussed later, the CPU 51 employs register renaming to increase processor throughput. In order to properly implement register renaming, the ISU 200 receives REGS₋₋ AVAIL signals from the register renaming freelist unit (FREELIST). Referring to FIG. 8, these signals include signals that indicate how many of the physical fixed point registers of the fixed point register file and rename unit (FXRFRN) 604 are available for renaming, how many of the floating point registers of the floating point register file and rename unit (FPRFRN) 605 are available for renaming, how many of the physical integer and floating point condition code registers in the floating point status and condition cede register file and rename unit (FSP-JCCRFRN) 606 are available for renaming. Referring beck to FIG. 7, if any of the instructions received from the fetch register 110 require register renaming, and physical registers are required for renaming but are not available as indicated by the REGS₋₋ AVAIL signals, then the ISU 200 cannot issue these instructions.

The foregoing issue constraints have been described with respect to the exemplary CPU 51 in order to demonstrate the concept of issue determination. Furthermore, implementations may exist which involve different and more or less issue constraints than those just described but do not depart from the basic concept of issue determination as described herein. Thus, those skilled in the art will recognize that issue constraints are implementation dependant and that the invention described herein is not to be limited by the issue constraints just described.

2. Instruction Serial Number Allocation also Instruction Status Storage

The exemplary CPU 51 assigns a unique identification tag that is associated with an instruction from the time the instruction is issued until the instruction completes execution and is ultimately retired. Sequential serial numbers are convenient/used as the instruction identification tags. The serial numbers are used during each stage and by virtually every block during exception-free processing and during CPU 51 recovery when exceptions or mispredictions occur. Instruction status information is stored in CPU 51 and continually updated in response to changes in status, such as execution completion signals, execution error signals, and branch instruction mispredict signals, and the like. The Precise State Unit (PSU) 300 within ISB 61 is responsible for allocating the instruction serial number tags and for tracking instruction status in response to signals received from other CPU 51 units, particularly from DFB 62.

In reference to FIG. 9, Precise State Unit (PSU) 300 is a functionally within ISB 61 and is responsible for (1) tracking the issue, execution, completion, and retirement status of instructions in CPU 51; (2) detecting and initiating branch mispredict recovery; (3) tracking the availability of certain machine resources including instruction serial numbers, checkpoints, and watchpoints; and (4) general exception handling and control. Several units within PSU 300, as shown in FIG. 9 and as described in greater detail hereinafter, are implemented to accomplish this functionality.

PSU 300 includes an Issue/Commit/Retire Unit (ICRU) 301 which maintains activity status information for all issued instructions until they are retired. ICRU 301 supplies ISU 200 with a signal (SN₋₋ AVAIL) that identifies up to four instruction serial numbers (SN's) for use by ISU 200 in the next instruction issue cycle. At the time ISU issues instructions, ISU 200 informs ICRU which of the up to four serial numbers provided (SN₋₋ AVAIL) to ISU in the previous cycle were validly issued by ISU in the form of the ISSUE₋₋ VALID signal that, as indicated earlier, identifies which serial number was allocated and which serial number was associated with each instruction. Recall that issue constraints may restrict ISU's ability to issue all of the instructions in the instruction window. ICRU 301 stores and maintains status information and address pointers to the status information to track instruction issue, execution, completion, deactivation, commitment, and retirement phase status for every instruction that was validly issued by ISU 200, independent of the type of instruction. ISU 200 also informs ICRU 301 with signal ISSUE₋₋ NOP which of the issued instructions are associated with nop and certain program control instructions, which allow deactivation in the same stage as which they are issued. ISSUE₋₋ NOP is not limited to the spedtic "nop" instruction which may be inserted into the instruction stream, such as for example, to introduce a pause or delay. When aggressive scheduling of long latency instructions such as load/store and other instructions referendng memory external to the CPU 51, ISU 200 also informs ICRU 301 in the form of an ISSUE₋₋ MEM signal that identifies which of the instructions in slot0-3 are long latency. (Aggressive scheduling of long latency instructions is separately described as an enhancement to the basic inventive structure and method.)

a. Issue/Commit/Reclaim Unit (ICRU)

Issue/Commit/Reclaim Unit (ICRU) 301 is functionally within PSU 300 and assigns instruction tags, such as the n-bit sequential serial numbers, and maintains activity status information for all issued instructions by defining and maintaining a data storage area for the instruction status information in memory internal to CPU 51. FIG. 10 shows a functional block diagram of components of ICRU 301 and input and output signals associated with ICRU operation. ICRU 301 is functionally organized into four areas. Instruction Status Information Data Structure 308 is responsible for storing instruction status information and updating the status in response to signals Data Structure Control Logic 309 which itself is responsive to signals from other CPU 51 units, particularly DFB 62. Pointer Data Structure 310 includes data storage areas for separately storing a plurality of a serial numbers that serve as status pointers to various instruction stage milestones in the CPU 51, such as issued, completed, retired, and the like. These serial number pointers are described in greater detail hereinafter. Pointer Control Logic 311 is responsible for evaluating the status information stored in Data Structure 308 in conjunction with data received from other CPU 51 units in order to update the serial number pointer to reflect then current CPU 51 state. Pointer values are provided as global outputs from ICRU 301 and PSU 300 to other units in the CPU 51.

Instruction Status Information Data Structure 308 comprises Active Instruction Ring Registers (A-ring) 312 and may optionally comprise Memory Instruction Ring Registers (M-ring) 324. Memory Instruction Ring registers are described elsewhere in this specification in connection with Aggressive Load/Store instruction scheduling. Data Structure Control Logic 309 comprises A-Ring Set/Clear Logic 313 and may optionally comprise M-Ring Set/Clear Logic 325. Pointer Control Logic 311 comprises ISN/NISN Initialization and Advance Logic 321, Next Instruction Serial Number Allocation Logic 322, and CSN/RRP Advance Logic 323, and may optionally cemise NMCSN Advance Logic 326, Machine Sync Generation Logic 327, and Backtrack Mode Pointer Adjustment Logic 328. Optional elements pertain to enhancements of the basic inventive structure and method and are described more fully hereinafter.

Operation of Issue/Commit/Reclaim Unit during Instruction issue stage is now described in reference to FIG. 10. The serial numbers (SN₋₋ AVAIL) sent to ISU 200 for allocation to issued instructions are selected by serial number allocation logic in ICRU based on pointers values within Pointer Data Structure 310. When the CPU 51 is initialized (such as on power-up), pointers within Pointer Data Structure 310 may also be initialized so that ICRU initially allocates the first serial numbers to ISU 200 (e.g. SN's 0-3) for instructions in the issue window.

ISU 200 sends ISSUE₋₋ VALID signal to Data Structure Control Logic 309 to inform ICRU which of the serial numbers provided in the previous cycle (e.g. which of the four SNs) where validly issued by ISU 200 and for which instruction slot. Set/Clear A-Ring Control Logic 313 uses this information and the values of pointers within Pointer Register 310 to write instruction status information into A-Ring 312. In one embodiment of the CPU 51, ISSUE₋₋ VALID is a four-bit vector that informs ICRU which of the instruction serial numbers (SN₋₋ AVAIL) were actually used by ISU 200 by identifying instruction slot for which an instruction was actually issued. ICRU can then determine which SN's were used based on beth SN₋₋ AVAIL and ISSUE₋₋ VALID.

An embodiment of Active Instruction Ring 312 is now described with reference to a diagrammatic representation in FIG. 11. The data structure in FIG. 11 is exemplary and those workers having ordinary skill in the art, in light of the teaching of this patent, will understand that a variety of data structures may be used to implant this Active Instruction Status Register. FIG. 11 shows Active Instruction Ring (A-ring) 312 which is implemented as a 64-bit data structure. (Memory Instruction Ring (M-Ring) 324 is also shown in diagrammatic form and will be described elsewhere in this specification with respect to an enhancement for aggressively scheduling long latency instructions.) Each of the sixty-four addressable locations in A-Ring 312 corresponds to an instruction serial number in the CPU 51. The set ("1") or cleared ("0") state of each Active-bit (A-bit) indicates whether the instruction is active ("1") or inactive ("0") in the CPU. Basically, instruction is actuated where it is issued and deactivated where it completes execution without error and was not mispredicted. For some instructions that are issued and effectively complete execution in a single machine cycle, the A-bit is cleared at instruction issue. The number of addressable locations in A-ring 312 limits the number of instructions that may be concurrently outstanding in the CPU.

In the exemplary processor, A-ring 312 is implemented as a circular, ring, or wrap-around data structure where pointers are moved along the data structure using "modulo-A-ring register length" type arithmetic (here, modulo-64 type arithmetic). That is, as a pointer is incrementally moved from a first data storage location (addressable bit 0) through a series of intermediate storage locations (e.g. locations 15, 16, . . . ) to the last data storage location (addressable bit 63), it will then return to the first location (addressable bit 0). Those of ordinary skilled in the art will, in light of the teachings of the present invention, realize that although a circular data structure is advantageous, it is not essential to the invention and other data structures implementing the features of the invention may be used. Furthermore, although the exemplary A-ring has sixty-four single-bit addressable locations to maintain the required status information, multi-bit addressable locations may alternatively be provided for storing these and additional status indicators. For example, in one embodiment, a 64-bit register with arbitrary rotation is used, and in a second embodiment eight 8-bit registers are used to provide the sixty-four A-ring 312 A-bits. A simple decoding circuit enables writing (set and clear) of the bits as described hereinafter.

"Instruction Issue" by the ISU 200 results in the allocation of an instruction serial number to the instruction. The number of allocatable serial numbers is limited by the number of addressable locations (e.g. bit positions) in A-ring 312. Each addressable A-ring location therefore corresponds to a unique serial number. For example, for the exemplary 64-bit circular A-ring, as many as 64 instruction serial numbers may be concurrently assigned. More or fewer serial numbers may be assigned by providing more or fewer A-ring locations. If all serial numbers are assigned, further instruction issue must be stalled by ISU 200 until serial numbers and locations on the A-ring are freed in subsequent machine cycles. ISU 200 is informed that SN are or are not available by the SN-AVAIL signal. Each addressable location in A-ring 312 corresponds to one of the available serial numbers so that an entry in the A-ring is made for each newly issued instruction by advancement of an Issued Serial Number Pointer (ISN) 314 by one for each instruction issued. Since multiple instructions may be issued during a single machine cycle, more than one A-bit may be set during each cycle and therefore ISN may be advanced by more than one A-ring location each cycle.

"Instruction Dispatch" by ISU 200 is the activation and sending of an instruction (having an assigned serial number) for execution to DFB 62. All dispatched instructions are also issued instructions but not all issued instructions are dispatched. All "dispatched" instructions have the bit corresponding to the assigned serial number in A-RING 312 set equal to "1" to indicate the instruction is active in the machine (1=active, 0=inactive or deactivated). Instructions which are issued but not dispatched correspond to known branches or nop-type instructions and for which instructions, the A-bit is cleared (or not set) at issue. These known branches and nop-type instructions do not require an execution unit to execute, and may be issued, executed, and completed in a single stage.

b. Instruction Issue Related Pointers and Pointer Maintenance During Issue Stage

FIG. 11 also shows several pointers (ISN, NISN, CSN, RRP, NMCSN, and PBSN) that are stored in pointer storage memory area 310 and point to locations on A-Ring 312 and M-Ring 324. Each pointer is element in a pointer storage unit 210 that stores one of the A-Rings location valves 0-64. Certain combinations of pointers may point to the same A-Ring or M-Ring location but other combinations may not. For example, NISN can never equal ISN, but at machine "sync" CSN=ISN=RRP. Issued Serial Number pointer (ISN) 314 and Next Issued Serial Number pointer (NISN) 315 maintain and track instruction issue status and generally limit advantage of other pointers. Committed Serial Number pointer (CSN) 316 tracks instruction commitment which follows instruction execution, completion, and deactivation for which no pointers are specifically provided. Retire and Reclaim Pointer (RRP) 317 tracks instruction retirement and controls resource reclaiming. Two additional pointers Earliest Predicted Branch Instruction pointer (PBSN) 318 and Non-Memory Committed Serial Number pointer (NMCSN) 319 are used to schedule and back execution of predicted branch instructions and long latency instructions such as load/store instructions. ICRU 301 provides current values for each of ISN, NISN, CSN, RRP, and NMCSN to a number of other units within the CPU 51. ICRU receives a value of PBSN 318 from Watchpoint Unit 308 within PSU 300 as described hereinafter. Each of these pointers are implemented as a six-bit vector in the exemplary CPU.

Issued Serial Number pointer (ISN) 314 always points to the serial number of the last issued instruction. An instruction is considered to have been issued when one of the serial numbers supplied by ICRU has actually been allocated by ISU 200. ISN and NISN are incremented in response to ISSUE₋₋ VALID from ISU 200 which informs ICRU of the number of instructions actually issued during that cycle. As ISN and NISN are incremented, the pointers effectively advanced around A-ring 312. The maximum number of positions the ISN can advance every machine cycle is determined by the peak issue rate of the machine, but may be limited to a smaller predetermined maximum number of instructions per cycle by other software of hardware controls. For example, in the exemplary CPU advancement of ISN and NISN are limited to four instruction serial numbers (A-ring locations) per machine cycle. When the CPU is initialized ISN is initialized to 0 (zero) and when additional instructions issue ISN is advanced by the number of newly issued instructions.

Next Issued Serial Number pointer (NISN) 315 always points to ISN+I (modulo A-ring length), so that if ISN=63, then NISN=0. Where A-ring 312 contains sixty-four entries, NISN=ISN+1 (modulo 64). This essentially the serial number of the next instruction to be issued (all instructions are issued in predicted PC order). While it is convenient to provide a separate pointer NISN, ISN alone could be used in some embodiments since NISN is always one greater than ISN. When the CPU is initialized NISN is initialized to 1 (one) and when additional instructions issue, NISN is advanced by the number of newly issued instructions. Initialization and advancement of ISN and NISN are performed by ISN/NISN Advance Logic Unit 321 in response to ISSUE₋₋ VALID from ISU 200.

ICRU 301 provides ISU 200 with four available instruction serial numbers that may be assigned to instructions as they are issued. Determination of the proper four instruction serial numbers is made in the Next Instruction Serial Number Allocation Logic 322 within Pointer Control Logic unit 311 based on the current values of lSN 314 and NISN 315. RRP 317 may limit allocation of SNS if the CU is full, that is if all SNs have been allocated and not reclaimed. ICRU 301 informs ISU 200 of the next series of (four) serial numbers that should be assigned to the issued instructions if the serial numbers are available by sending SN₋₋ AVAIL signals to ISU 200.

In one embodiment of CPU 51, SN₋₋ AVAIL composes four seven-bit signals (SN₋₋ SLOT₋₋ 0, SN₋₋ SLOT₋₋ 1, SN₋₋ SLOT₋₋ 2, and SN₋₋ SLOT₋₋ 3) that identify the serial numbers to be assigned to the up to four instructions in slots 0-3 of the issue window. Six bits supply the serial number while the seventh bit is a serial number validity bit. If the validity bit for that serial number is not set, the instruction serial number is still active in the CPU 51 and should not be used by ISU. The validity bit may not be set if all sixty-four instructions supported by the sixty-four bit A-ring 312 are active in the CPU 51. Since ISU 200 can only issue an instruction if a serial number is available, ISU may have to wait for previously issued instructions to commit and retire before issuing additional instructions. Instruction commitment and retirement is described hereinafter.

FIG. 12 shows Status Control Logic Unit 309 in greater detail including the structure of A-Ring Bit Set/Clear Logic (ASCL) 313. ASCL 313 comprises Set Logic 331 and Clear Logic 333, as well as an Address Decode Logic Units 332, 334 associated with the Set and Clear Logic Units 331,333, respectively. Set Logic Unit 331 receives ISSUE₋₋ VALID signal from ISU 200, and the decoded NISN pointer address from Address Decode Logic Unit 332. A-ring Set Logic Unit 331 then sets A-bits corresponding to the number of instructions actually issued by ISU to "1" via A-ring write port 342. A-bits are cleared when instructions are deactivated and/or CPU reset. The number of write ports 342 is selected to support the maker of instructions that will be activated (or deactivated) each cycle. Other structures shown in FIG. 12 relating to M-RING 324 are discussed hereinafter in conjunction with aggressive scheduling of long latency instructions and with instruction commitment and retirement.

In one embodiment, ISSUE₋₋ VALID is a four-bit vector received from ISU 200 where assertion (bit set "1" or high signal level as seated) at position bit-i indicates instruction in the i-th instruction issue window slot has been issued. ICRU 301 knows which serial numbers are associated with which slot by virtue of the SN₋₋ SLOT₋₋ i signals described previously. Since instructions are issued in sequential program order, there are only five possible states for ISSUE₋₋ VALID in a four instruction issue CPU C"0000", "0001", "0011 ", "1111"). ICRU also receives a "nop-type" instruction signal (ISSUE₋₋ NOP) from ISU which informs ICRU that the instruction is a nop-type instruction as described. In one embodiment of the CPU 51, ISSUE₋₋ NOP is a four-bit signal where assertion at position bit-i indicates i-th instruction in the slot is a "no-op"-class instruction. In implementing aggressive Local/Store instruction scheduling, ISSUE₋₋ MEM is a four-bit signal where assertion at position bit-i indicates i-th instruction in the slot is a memory referencing instruction. Generally, a no-op instruction is either a control transfer instructions such as a branch, or a write ASR, write FPRS, or write PIL. The instructions "write ASI", "write FPRS" and "write PIL" are executed in the corresponding Control Register Unit 800 and not in DFB 62 and are therefore are treated as NOP-type instructions. Consequently, their corresponding ISSUE₋₋ NOP is set to `1` leading to the A-bit be. set to `0`. Tcc instructions are not issued when CC is not known. Tcc instructions are issued as a NOP instruction if CC is known and false. Tcc instructions are issued with ISSUE₋₋ NOP=0 in other cases. These instructions do not require a DFB 62 execution unit to execute and generally complete in the same machine cycle as issued. When the corresponding instruction is of the "nop"-class such as a "branch" (br) instruction, ISSUE₋₋ NOP is set to "1". When ISSUE₋₋ NOP is set to "1", the corresponding A-bit is set to `0`, i.e. the instruction is instantly deactivated and committable. (Instruction commitment and modification of A-bits at commitment are described hereinafter.)

The sixty-four activity bils in the A-ring indicate the activeness of the instructions coexisting in the CPU. The A-bits do not need to be initialized because they will be set and cleared every cycle before they are used. The A-bits are set according to the ISSUE₋₋ VALID, ISSUE₋₋ NOP, and NISN.

Because the branch instructions have the A-bit cleared at issue, additional steps are taken to prevent CSN 316 (see description hereinafter) from advancing past a speculatively executed branch instruction. In the exemplary embodiment, a branch condition cede is stored in Watchpoint Unit 304 at the time the branch instruction is issued. Watchpoint Unit 304 monitors instruction execution and when the speculatively issued branch instruction completes, Watchpoint compares the execution result with the branch condition code required to validate the speculative issue. Condition cede comparison provides a determination as to whether the speculative execution was correctly predicted. If the speculative execution was incorrect, CPU 51 recovery methods (such as backup and/or backstep) are initiated to undo the execution thereby preventing CSN from advancing past the mispredicted branch in spite of the cleared A-bit, which would otherwise preclude recovery. Special attention must be taken to initiate machine recovery fast enough to prevent instruction commitment of the incorrectly issued instruction sequence. Prior to evaluation, the pending instruction itself prevents commitment of the mispredicted instruction sequence. Watchpoints and CPU 51 recovery are described in greater detail elsewhere in this specification.

Aspects of an embodiment of the inventive method, including the use of instruction tags to track instruction status and maintain precise state are illustrated in the flow-charts of FIGS. 13-15. FIG. 13 is a diagrammatic flow-chart of an embodiment of the method of using instruction tags to track status and maintain precise state. FIG. 14 is a diagrammatic flow-chart of an embodiment of the inventive method for tracking instruction status to maintain precise state. FIG 15 is a flow-chart diagram of the method for writing and maintaining status information in the Active Instruction Ring and Memory Instruction Ring according to an embodiment of the present invention.

3. Register Renaming

To remove some register dependencies so that more instructions can be issued per machine cycle by the ISU 200, the CPU 51 performs register renaming during the issue stage. This may be done in a similar that described in the copending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/388,364 entitled "METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COORDINATING THE USE OF PHYSICAL REGISTERS IN A MICROPROCESSOR"referenced earlier and/or that described in M. Johnson's text Superscalar Microprocessor Design at pages 48-55.

Referring to FIG. 8, to implement register renaming, the DFB 62 includes the FXRFRN 604, FPRFRN 605, and CCRFRN 610 of the FSR/CCRFRN 606. As mentioned briefly earlier, the FXRFRN 604 contains physical fixed point registers for storing fixed point data, the FPRFRN 605 contains physical floating point registers for storing floating point data, the CCRFRN 610 contains physical integer (fixed point) and floating point condition code registers (XICC and FCCs) for storing integer and floating point condition code data. The FXRFRN 604, FPRFRN 605, and CCRFRN 610 may each be configured as shown in FIG. 16.

As shown in FIG. 16, the register file and rename unit (RFRN) 612 includes a physical register file 614 that includes physical registers. The RFRN also includes rename mapping logic 613 that maps logical and/or architected registers specified by an instruction to physical registers in the physical register file 614. For example, with SPARC-V9 instructions, the rename mapping logic of the FXRFRN 604 could perform a mapping of 32 architected to 80 logical to 128 physical fixed point registers, the 32 architectural or logical single and double precision floating point registers are mapped into 2 sets of 64 single precision (32-bit) renamed floating point registers (odd and even), the five architected or logical Condition Code Registers (xicc, fcc0, fcc1, fcc2, and fcc3) map to 32 renamed Condition Code Registers. The architectural to logical mapping is due to the fact that SPARC-V9 fixed point instructions specify architected registers that map to logical registers in accordance with the current window pointer (CWP) stored in the CWP register of the control register file 800 shown in FIG. 17.

The control logic 613 of the RFRN receives instructions (F₋₋ INSTs₋₋ BRPs) from the fetch register of the BRB 59 during each issue stage. In response, the control logic 613 decodes the instructions and determines which of the instructions requires physical registers as sources and/or destinations from the register file 614 of this particular RFRN.

The rename mapping logic 615 first maps each logical or architected source register specified by the instructions to the currently mapped physical register in the register file and provides the corresponding physical register tags to the reservation stations of the appropriate execution units (FPU 600, FXU 601, FXAGU 602, or LSU 603) in the TAGS₋₋ R signals. For each physical register tag, the rename mapping logic has a data-valid (DV) bit that identifies whether the data in the mapped physical source register is available yet as a source. The DV bits are provided by the rename mapping logic 615 to the reservation stations of the appropriate execution units in the DV₋₋ R signal. Moreover, if the data is available as indicated by the DV bits, then it is provided by the mapped physical source registers in the DATA₋₋ R signals.

For each RFRN (i.e., FXRFRN 604, FPRFRN 605, and CCRFRN 610), the FREELIST unit 700 contains a list of all of the free physical registers of the register file 614 of the RFRN. Free or available registers are those that are not being currently used by instructions that have not been retired. These available physical registers are identified by the FREE₋₋ REGS signals from the FREELIST unit 700 each cycle.

Thus, after the logical or architected source registers have been mapped, the rename mapping logic 615 then maps each logical or architected destination register specified by the instructions to an available or free physical register identified by the FREE₋₋ REGS signals and sets the corresponding DV bit to indicate that the data in that register is not yet available. The rename mapping logic 615 then provides the physical register tags for the newly mapped physical destination registers and the corresponding DV bits to the reservation stations of the appropriate execution units in the TAGS₋₋ R and DV₋₋ R signals.

Moreover, the rename logic 615 provides the old logical or architected to physical register mapping to the Reclaim Format Unit (RRF) 302 of the PSU 300. It does so by sending the logical or architected register tags and the physical register tags for the previously mapped physical destination registers to the RRF 302 in the LOG₋₋ OPHYS₋₋ TAGS signals. The LOG₋₋ OPHYS₋₋ TAGS signals from each RFRN 612 include a field to indicate that these signals come from that particular RFRN.

The RRF 302 is shown in greater detail in FIG. 18. The RRF includes a data storage structure 366. In the exemplary CPU 51, in which up to 64 issued but not yet retired instructions may be assigned serial numbers, the data storage structure 366 includes 64 addressable storage elements or entries. Each storage element corresponds to one of the instruction serial numbers. Moreover, each storage element of the data storage structure 366 includes an FP or FX logical to old physical map field and an FCC or XICC logical to old physical map field. Various structures may be used for implementing RRF 302. One exemplary RRF is implemented as a sixty-four register ×29-bit bur-bank interleaved RAM, wherein the fields are packed or bundled during the write to RRF cycle and unpacked or unbundled upon readout during backstepping.

The control logic 365 of the RRF receives the LOG₋₋ OPHYS₋₋ TAGS signals from the DFB 62 and determines which contain floating point register tags from the FXRFRN 604, fixed point register tags from the FPRFRN 605, and XICC and FCC tags from the CCRFRN 610. The control logic 365 also receives the NISN pointer from the ICRU 301 of the PSU 300 and the ISSUE₋₋ VALID signal from the ISU 200. In response to the NISN pointer and the ISSUE₋₋ VALID signal, the control logic 365 determines the serial numbers of the issued instructions for which the LOG₋₋ OPHYS₋₋ TAGS signals are being received.

In the exemplary CPU 51, instructions can only modify floating point and FCC registers simultaneously or fixed point and XICC registers simultaneously, but not fixed point, floating point, XICC, and FCC registers simultaneously. Thus for each instruction for which fixed point or floating point logical and old physical register tags have been received in the LOG₋₋ OPHYS₋₋ TAGS signals, the control logic 365 writes these tags (FP₋₋ TAGS or FX₋₋ TAGS) into the FP or FX logical to physical map field of the storage element which corresponds to the serial number of the issued instruction. Similarly, for each instruction for which FCC or XICC logical and old physical register tags have been received, the control logic 365 writes the FCC or XICC logical to old physical tags into the FCC logical to physical map field of the storage element corresponding to the serial number of the issued instruction. Thus, in the case where an instruction requires both floating point and FCC registers or both fixed point and XICC registers as destinations, the logical and old physical register tags contained by the LOG₋₋ OPHYS₋₋ TAGS signals for this instruction are written to the same storage element. However, those skilled in the art will appreciate that the RRF 302 could be constructed to store the logical to old physical mappings for an instruction that modifies fixed point, floating point, XICC, and FCC registers simultaneously.

Thus, the RRF 302 serves as a sequential historical ledger from which earlier logical to physical mappings or relationships can be reconstructed if necessary. For example, if it becomes necessary to undo an instruction corresponding to SN="X", the logical and old physical register tags are identified in RRF using SN="X" as an index. Then, these tags are provided to the appropriate RFRN to restore the logical to physical register mapping that existed just prior to execution of instruction SN="X" and the newly mapped physical register is returned to the Freelist. This effectively reverses the register renaming and restores register state to the state that existed just prior to execution of the instruction. When it is necessary to undo several instructions, the same procedure is applied on a reversed step by step basis beginning with ISN and decrementing back to SN="X." This process is described in greater detail later.

FIG. 19 provides an example of register renaming for an add instruction with logical source registers L41 and L42 and destination register L47. In accordance with the foregoing, the logical source registers L41 and L42 are mapped by the rename mapping logic 615 to the physical registers P50 and P52. Then, the logical destination register L47is re-mapped to the free physical register P99 provided by the FREELIST unit 700 and the logical register tag for the logical register L47 and the physical register tag for the previously mapped (old) physical register P78 is provided to the RRF for mapping with the serial number (SN=13) assigned to the add instruction. As is evident from this example, each "physical" register tag appears in one and only one of: (1) Freelist 700; (2) rename mapping logic of FXRFRN 604, FPRFRN 605, or CCRFRN 610; and (3) RRF 302.

4. Dispatch to Reservation Stations

Furthermore, referring to FIG. 8, during the issue stage, the reservation stations of the FPU 600, FXU 601, FXAGU 602, and LSU 603 receive the F₋₋ INSTs₋₋ BRPs instructions from the BRB 59. In response, each of the reservation stations extracts the opcodes and immediate data from these instructions.

The reservation stations of each of the FPU 600, FXU 601, FXAGU 602, and LSU 603 also receives during the issue stage the serial numbers and the checkpoint numbers that were assigned to the instructions that were issued. These are provided by the SNs and CHKPT₋₋ Ns signals received from the ISB 62.

In order to execute mathematical and read/write instructions that involve floating point data, the reservation station of the FPU 600 may receive during the issue stage available data, data valid bits, and FP and CC physical register tags (FP₋₋ DATA₋₋ R, FP₋₋ DV₋₋ R, FP₋₋ TAGS₋₋ R, CC₋₋ DATA₋₋ R, CC₋₋ DV₋₋ R, CC₋₋ TAGS₋₋ R) from the FPRFRN 605 and the CCRFRN 610 in the FSR 607. Similarly, the FXU 601 may receive during the issue stage data from the control register file 800 over the ISB2DFB bus and available data, data valid bits, and FX and CC physical register tags (FX-₋₋ DATA₋₋ R, FX-DV₋₋ R, FX₋₋ TAGS₋₋ R, CC₋₋ DATA₋₋ R, CC₋₋ DV₋₋ R, CC₋₋ TAGS₋₋ R) from the FXRFRN 604 and CCRFRN 610 to execute mathematical, program control, and read/write instructions that involve fixed point data. To execute address generation operations for load/store instructions and fixed point non-multiply/divide mathematical instructions, the FXAGU 602 may receive data and FX and CC physical register tags (FX₋₋ DATA₋₋ R, FX₋₋ DV₋₋ R, FX₋₋ TAGS₋₋ R, CC₋₋ DATA₋₋ R, CC₋₋ DV₋₋ R, CC₋₋ TAGS₋₋ R) from the FXRFRN 604 and/or CCRFRN 610. However, as was indicated earlier, the FXAGU 602 could be configured similar to the FXU 601 to execute program control, multiply/divide, and control register read/write instructions in which case it would receive the appropriate available data and physical register tags from the FXRFRN 604 and CCRFRN 610. Moreover, the LSU 603 may receive during the issue stage available data and FP and FX physical register tags (FX₋₋ DATA₋₋ R, FX₋₋ DV₋₋ R, FX₋₋ TAGS₋₋ R, FP₋₋ DATA₋₋ R, FP-DV₋₋ R, and FP₋₋ TAGS₋₋ R) from the FPRFRN 605 and/or FXRFRN 604 and the contents of the FSR register of the FSPJCCRFRN 606 to execute load/store instructions.

Then, for each issued instruction for which an entry in a reservation station is available as identified by the ENTRIES₋₋ AVAIL signal, that reservation station places in the identified entry the extracted opcode, serial number, checkpoint number, physical destination and/or source register tags, and available data for that instruction. Furthermore, for each physical source register tag for which data is already available as identified by the received data valid bits, the reservation station sets another data valid bit in the reservation station to indicate that the data associated with the register tag is available. Also, if the instruction involves immediate data, then the data valid bit is also set since the data is immediately available and stored in the reservation station entry.

C. Instruction Execution and Completion

Referring again to FIG. 6, during the issue stage, the PC logic 106 receives fetched instructions (F₋₋ INSTs₋₋ BRPs) from the fetch register 110 and decodes them. It also receives the ISSUE₋₋ VALID signal from the ISU 200 to determine which of the instructions it is decoding where actually issued. For certain program control instructions which can be issued, predictively executed and completed in one machine cycle, the PC logic predicts the program flow and computes the FPC, APC, and NAPC values based on the prediction. For all other instructions, the PC logic computes the FPC value for the next machine cycle based on the FPC value for the current machine cycle and on how many instructions were issued during the current machine cycle as indicated by the ISSUE₋₋ VALID signal. For those instructions as well, it computes the APC and NAPC values based on the APC for the previous machine cycle and on how many instructions the ISSUED₋₋ VALID signal indicates were issued during the current machine cycle.

For example, if any of the instructions that are issued are conditional branch instructions, such as the SPARC-V9 BPcc, Bicc, BPr, FBfcc, and FBPfcc instructions, then the PC logic 106 decodes the corresponding BRP fields for these instructions in order to determine whether to predict to take or not take the branch. If the branch is predicted taken, then the PC logic 106 extracts the displacement value from the instruction and uses it to compute the new FPC, APC, and NAPC values for the next machine cycle. If the branch is not taken, then the FPC, APC, and NAPC values are computed normally for no change in program flow.

But, if any of the instructions that are issued are return type jump and link instructions, such as the SPARC-V9 JMPL[rd=0] instructions, then the PC logic 106 outputs a POP signal to pop off the return prediction stack 105 a predicted JMPL target PC (P₋₋ JMPL₋₋ PC) value which is used by the PC logic 106 to form the new FPC, APC, and NAPC values. Since JMPL[rd=0] instructions are used to return from subroutines, PC logic 106 outputs a PUSH signal to push onto the return prediction stack 105 a P₋₋ JMPL₋₋ PC anytime it determines that a CALL or call type jump and link, such as the SPARC-V9 JMPL[rd=15] instruction was issued. The P₋₋ JMPL₋₋ PC pushed onto the return prediction stack 105 is the APC value for the instruction incremented by 8. Furthermore, since a P₋₋ JMPL₋₋ PC is pushed onto the return prediction stack 105 anytime that a CALL or JMPL[rd=15] instruction is issued, the PC logic 106 must also make sure that a P₋₋ JMPL₋₋ PC is popped off the return prediction stack 105 anytime a RETURN instruction is issued.

Additionally, the issued instructions may include unconditional branch always instructions, such as the SPARC-V9 BPA, BA, FBA, and FBPA instructions. In this case, the PC logic 106 extracts the displacement values from these instructions and uses them to compute the new FPC, APC and NAPC values.

Since the PC logic 106 does not need to wait for additional data from the DFB 62 for conditional branch, branch always, and JMPL[rd=0] instructions, these types of instructions can be issued, executed, and completed in the same stage. Furthermore, since issued conditional branches will be predicted taken or not taken and because predicted target FPC values will be computed for JMPL[rd=0] instructions, subsequently fetched instructions will be speculatively fetched and therefore speculatively executed.

Furthermore, the issued instructions may include other kinds of program control instructions such CALL and RETURN instructions and JMPL instructions other than JMPL[rd=0] instructions, such as the call type JMPL[rd=15] instruction. In this case, the PC logic 106 waits for the DFB 62 to compute an FPC value and provide it on the DFB2BRB bus during the execute stage. Referring to FIG. 8, since the FPC value is fixed point data, the FXU 601 computes the FPC value. Then during the complete stage, the PC logic 106 takes this value and forms the new FPC, APC, and NAPC values.

As will be discussed later in greater detail, when any of the issued instructions are return from trap handling routine instructions, such as the SPARC-V9 DONE or RETRY instructions, then the PC logic 106 receives the trap PC (TPC) value or trap NPC (TNPC) value from the RD₋₋ TPC₋₋ TNPC signals provided by the control register file 800 shown in FIG. 7. Referring to FIG. 17, the trap stack 815 of the control register file 800 provides these signals when the ISU 200 output RETRY₋₋ DONE₋₋ IS signal indicating that a RETRY or DONE instruction was issued. The PC logic 106 then uses the TPC or TNPC value received from the trap stack 814 to form the new FPC, APC, and NAPC values.

For other issued instructions, the PC logic 106 increments the preceding PC and NPC values during the issue stage to generate the new PC and NPC values for the next fetch stage.

Referring to FIG. 8, an instruction issued during the issue stage can be executed by the FPU 600, FXU 601, FXAGU 602, and LSU 603, only when all of the data it requires is placed in the corresponding reservation station entry. Since the data for instructions issued later than others becomes available sooner, these instructions may be executed and completed ahead of the earlier issued instructions.

As indicated earlier, the reservation station knows that the source data of a physical source register is not available when the data valid bit for the physical register indicates so. Thus, the reservation stations receive and monitor the appropriate available data, data valid bits, and physical register tags (FX₋₋ DATA₋₋ F, FX₋₋ DV₋₋ F, FX₋₋ TAGS₋₋ F, FP₋₋ DATA₋₋ F, FP₋₋ DV₋₋ F, FP₋₋ TAGS₋₋ F, CC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F, CC₋₋ DV₋₋ F, CC₋₋ TAGS₋₋ F) forwarded from the FXRFRN 604; FPRFRN 605, and CCRFRN 610 to determine when the data is available. The reservation station grabs the forwarded data intended for a particular register when the corresponding forwarded physical register tag matches the physical register tag stored in the entry of the reservation station.

When all data dependencies have been met for an instruction (i.e, when all the needed data has become available), the execution unit then execute the instruction using the instruction data stored in the entry of the reservation station for that particular instruction. The types of instructions executed by the execution units 600-603 have been described earlier in regard to storing entries in the reservation stations.

The executed instructions are then completed when the data they generate is stored in the physical register identified by the physical destination register tag stored in the reservation station in the entry for the instruction. During completion, the execution units 600-603 also send error and completion status information to the PSU 300 with the ERR₋₋ STAT signals.

Moreover, referring to FIG. 7, the ISU 200 decodes the instructions it receives from the fetch register 100 to determine if any of the issued instructions are read/write instructions of the control registers 801-814 shown in FIG. 17. The control registers 801-814 are used in the overall control of the CPU 51 and may include privileged, non-privileged, and ancillary state registers of the type described in the SPARC-V9 Architecture Manual.

For issued read instructions of the control registers, such as the SPARC-V9 RDPR and RDASR instructions, the ISU 200 Outputs RD/WR₋₋ CNTRL signals that identify one of the registers 801-814 and indicate that it is to be read. In response, the control logic 816 of the control register file 800 outputs to the Watchpoint unit 304 the contents (RD₋₋ CNTRL₋₋ REG) of the control register identified by the RDANR₋₋ CNTRL signals.

Since as will be discussed later, the CPU 51 makes checkpoints and corresponding watchpoints for read instructions of the control registers 801-814, the ISU 200 generates a DO₋₋ WATCHPT signal and DO₋₋ CHKPT signals. The DO₋₋ CHKPT signals indicate that a checkpoint should be made and contain the checkpoint number for this checkpoint. The DO₋₋ WATCHPT signal indicates that a watchpoint should be formed by the watchpoint unit 304 at the checkpoint number provided by the DO₋₋ CHKPT signals. The watchpoint unit 304 has 16 addressable storage elements with each corresponding to one of the 16 checkpoint numbers. Thus, in response to DO₋₋ WATCHPT and DO₋₋ CHKPT signals, it stores the contents of the control register that was read in the storage element corresponding to the checkpoint number provided in the DO₋₋ CHKPT signals.

The read control register instruction is also provided to the reservation station of the FXU 600 for further execution. Thus, the checkpoint number of the instruction is stored in the reservation station entry for the instruction. Then, when the FXU 601 executes the read control register instruction, it outputs the checkpoint number of the instruction to the watchpoint unit 304. In response, the watchpoint unit outputs the control register data that was read in earlier to the FXU 600 which then provides it and a corresponding physical destination register tag to the FXRFRN 604 for storage in a fixed point register. Thus, the CPU 51 does not have to be synced to perform a control register read.

To perform writes to the control registers (such as the SPARC-V9 WRPR and WRASR), the FXU 601 executes the instruction data stored for the instruction in the reservation station and outputs the data on the DFB2BRB bus. As shown in FIG. 17, the data is then provided to the control register file 800. Since the ISU 200 has generated a RD/WR CNTRL signal that indicates that a control register write has been issued and to what register the write is to occur, the RD/WR/UPDATE logic 816 then writes the data into the appropriate control register.

As indicated previously, the exemplary CPU 51 employs register windows for the fixed point registers. Register wind6w operation is described in detail in the SPARC-V9 Architecture Manual. Thus, the ISU 200 also determines when a register window control instruction has been issued. In doing so, it generates WIN₋₋ CNTRL signals that indicate that a window control instruction has been issued and identify the specific kind of register window operation to be performed. These signals are provided to the control register file 800, as shown in FIG. 17. In response, the RD/WR/UPDATE logic 816 then performs the updating register window operations indicated by the WIN₋₋ CNTRL signals.

D. PSU Participation in the Instruction Execution Stage

Once instructions have been dispatched to the appropriate execution unit within DFB 62, ICRU 301 waits for instruction completion and monitors error and status information for each instruction serial number to arrive over the Execution Data Forward Busses between DFB 62 and PSU 300. PSU participation in the Execution Stage is limited to receiving execution status information. When instructions complete execution without error and have not mispredicted, the instruction is deactivated; however, if an execution exception occurred or the speculative execution was mispredicted then the instruction is not deactivated or CPU 51 initiates recovery procedures. A-Ring status information is updated to reflect correct or incorrect speculative execution and exception or exception-free execution. When an instruction was correctly predicted and executions without exception, ICRU 301 clears the A-ring bit associated with the serial number to deactivate the instruction.

In the exemplary CPU 51 ,DFB 62 includes Floating-Point Functional Unit (FPU) 600, Fixed-Point Functional Unit (FXU) 601, Fixed-Point/Address Generation Functional Unit (FXAGU) 602, and Load/Store Functional Unit (LSU) 603, as well as FPRFRN 605, FXRFRN 604, CCRFRN 606, and FSR 607. In the exemplary CPU, each DFB functional unit can process as many as two instructions per machine cycle so that instruction execution completion is limited (by hardware constraints) to a maximum of eight instructions per machine cycle. In one embodiment of the CPU, FPU 600 can process two instructions at a time but can only output one instruction result, therefore in that embodiment, instruction completion is limited to seven instructions; however, there is no reason why two outputs cannot be implemented. FIG. 8 shows a functional block diagram of the major functional units within DFB 62 and major signals passed between DFB 62 and ISB 61.

When a dispatched instruction has completed execution in DFB 62, and instruction identification error and offer status information (ERR₋₋ STAT) are broadcast back to PSU 300 including to ICRU 301 (and other units) on the execution data forward busses. Data and status are received for each instruction issued, but may be received out of order. Execution status information signals for each instruction may include for example whether an error occurred during execution, error type, condition codes for evaluating if speculative execution was correctly predicted, serial number, instruction checkpoint (the checkpoint that the machine will backup to if it faults and requires a backup), and whether the instruction involved a read or write to a control register.

The broadcast instruction serial number is used to index into A-ring 312 by Address Decode Logic 334 in FIG. 12. The number of A-Ring write ports 341,342 (and read ports 343 for CSN/RRP Advance Logic 323) on the A-ring are preferably selected to correspond with the peak execution bandwidth of the processor. If a particular instruction causes an error, A-Ring Clear Logic 333 writes a "0" to the A-bit corresponding to the particular instruction serial number and the instruction is thereafter considered deactivated. However, if an instruction completes with error, the corresponding active-bit in the A-Ring is not cleared, the instruction is still considered active, and other processor recovery steps are taken to recover from the exception or error condition. The CSN eventually will catch up with ISN which points to the location one slot ahead of the erroring instruction. CSN cannot pass he SN of the erroring instruction because its A-bit is still set. Then when the execution trap is taken, the A-bit of the erroring instruction will be overwritten with a "1" to permit CSN and RRP to advance.

The Taken Trap (TT) field which identifies the trap type is popped off the TrapStack and decoded to determine whether the trap is an execution trap (etrap). The etrap is then handled by issuing a "DONE" or "RETRY". If the etrap can be successfully handled, a ETRAP₋₋ CLEAR signal is asserted by the trap-handler to clear the A-bit. Similar logic is provided to Clear M-bits in M-RING 324.

The data and status signals provide the serial number of the instruction in each execution issue slot and are also used by PSU 300 to determine exception handling prior in instances where multiple instructions fault to determine which exception is temporarily earlier. (Prioritization of exceptions is discussed further relative to Priority Logic and State Machine PLSM 307.) In the exemplary processor, the serial number arrives one cycle earlier than error and status information, thereby permitting serial number decode by Address Decode Logic L)nit 334 in advance of arrival of any error information so that the bit can be cleared (when no error is present) or not cleared (when an error is present) without incurring further delay in the address decode logic. When an error or other exception is detected, appropriate steps are taken to handle the error or exception as described hereinafter in this patent.

E. Instruction Commitment

The structure and method described heretofore provide structure and method for tracking the issue and execution status of as many instructions as addressable locations in A-ring 312, sixty-four instructions in the exemplary embodiment. However absent structure and method to recover the CPU resources, resources allocated by the CPU 51 to the instructions, including the serial numbers and associated A-bits for example, would remain allocated to the instructions even though the instructions had been completed and deactivated. By adding additional pointers associated with the A-ring data structure and moving the pointers in response to changes in status of relevant instructions within the CPU 51, particularly deactivation, instructions may be committed and resources may be retired and reclaimed for subsequent use by other instructions. In this way resources are continuously available for newly issued instructions.

Committed Serial Number pointer (CSN) 316 points to the last committed instruction. A "committed instruction" is defined to be an instruction that has completed execution without error so that it has progressed from issue through execution and is older than any speculatively issued predicted central transfer (branch) instruction that may need to be undone and may not be undone. A committed instruction need never be undone. By definition, all instructions prior to the committed Instruction Serial Number (CSN) pointer 316 have completed execution without error and never need to be undone. The amount that CSN advances every 10 machine cycle sets the maximum instruction commitment rate of the machine. Instructions that have completed and have been deactivated are not deemed to be committed until CSN has advanced to or beyond serial numbers for whole instructions in A-ring 312.

As described previously for ISN 314, the maximum number of positions that CSN 316 can advance every machine cycle may be limited to a smaller maximum number of instructions per cycle by software, hardware or other controls. For example, in one the embodiment of the inventions that limits advancement of ISN to four instructions per machine cycle, CSN is limited to eight per cycle by hardware imposed limitations. CSN in addition can be equal to ISN but can never advance beyond ISN around the A-Ring. (Because of the A-Ring structure, CSN may be strictly numerically less than, equal to, or greater than ISN.) When the CPU is initialized, CSN is initialized to 0 (zero), and then advanced according to changes in instruction status and predetermined CSN advancement rules described hereinafter.

As active-bits are cleared in the Active Instruction Ring, CSN is advanced according to predetermined rules to "commit" instructions which have completed execution. In general, the CSN pointer may lag behind instructions that have already completed execution (i.e. are deactivated). CSN/RRP Advance Logic Unit 323 is responsible for advancing the position of the CSN and RRP pointers. Each machine cycle, CSN/RRP Logic unit 323 attempts to advance CSN past completed de-activated instructions (activity bit="0" in the A-ring) without passing ISN. Except when deferred trap occurs, CSN advances only based on the set or cleared condition of A-bits in A-ring 312 and predetermined rules implemented (e.g. software, firmware, and/or hardware) within logic unit 323, CSN/RRP only needs to query the status of the A-ring itself and remain mindful of ISN to determine the proper serial number address for CSN. When a deferred trap is taken and successfully handled, PLSM 307 sends a DEFERRED₋₋ TRAP signal to CSN/RRP advance logic control unit 323 Which causes CSN to be advanced by one SN location, allowing CSN and later RRP to advance past the instruction that caused the exception. In one embodiment of the invention, the advancement of CSN is limited by a predetermined maximum instruction commitment rate (eight instructions per machine cycle) that is selected based on the desire to limit the hardware required to implement movement of the CSN pointer.

In principle, the CSN can advance up to and be equal with ISN. When ISN=CSN, the CPU is empty, that is, all issued instructions are committed. In practice, it may be advantageous to restrict the maximum advancement of the CSN [to eight instructions per machine cycle (for the four instruction issue machine) because] so that the logic can be simplified and the hardware required reduced. For example, four-issue per cycle CPU, the CSN advancement is limited to eight SNs per cycle. The rules governing the advancement of CSN may be summarized as follows: (1) Advance CSN up to, inclusive, ISN; (2) Advance CSN no more than eight instruction serial numbers in one cycle; (3) Advance up to, exclusive, the first "1" in the A-ring which corresponds to an active instruction that cannot be commited yet. More rigorously, CSN is generally advanced (see modification for certain exceptions below) according to the following relationship: CSN=min(CSN+4, ISN, slot₋₋ A), where A(CSN+1) . . . ) A(slot₋₋ A) are all "0" and A(slot₋₋ A+1)=1. In this expression "min" is the minimum function, "slot₋₋ A" refers to an A-bit location in A-Ring 312, and A(slot₋₋ A) is the bit-state of that A-bit location (e.g. "1" or "0"). The rules for advancing CSN are modified when a deferred trap is deleted and taken such as an unfinished floating point operation exception or a data breakpoint exception are detected. Unfinished floating point exceptions and data breakpoint exceptions are identified by the execution status signals (ERR₋₋ STAT from DFB 62. When these exceptions occur and the Pap is handled CSN is advanced by 1 (one), that is CSN←CSN+1, so that it advances past the instruction that caused the exception. PSU 300 is particularly concerned about unfinished floating-point operations and data breakpoints, both of which may require special handling of the pointers, since if A-bits are not cleared for handled traps the CPU would fill up and stall.

By limiting CSN advancement to the "maximum(8, ISN, the next A-bit=1)" simple hardware circuitry may be implemented to move CSN to the proper position. For example, A-ring 312 can be implemented as eight 8-bit registers. At the A-ring read port 343 of these eight 8-bit registers, the registers of the surrounding CSN are read out, and the content of these read-out registers is brought into two separate 8-bit buses. Concatenating these buses into a single 16-bit bus then shifting the bus by from 0-bits to 8-bits forms an 8-bit window of interest (maximum CSN advancement of 8) for advancing the old CSN. A "finding the first 1" circuit will yield the amount that CSN will advance.

ICRU 301 also informs Checkpoint Unit 303 of the new Committed Serial Number (CSN) 316 by sending a committed serial number signal (CSN) signal and issued Send Number (ISN) to Checkpoint Unit 303 so that it can free up any allocated checkpoints have a serial number less than CSN. Relative to locations on the circular-A-Ring rather than strict mathematical order (i.e. SN≦⊙CSN relative to locations on the circular A-Ring). Checkpoints are described in greater detail elsewhere in this specification. In one embodiment of the CPU 51, CSN, as well as the other pointers described herein is a six-bit vector that encodes the instruction serial number corresponding to the addressable A-Ring bit location.

F. Instruction Retirement & Resource Recovery

CPU allocatable resources are recovered by provider. An additional pointer is provided to track and control instruction retirement and resource reclaiming for resources that are freed when instructions are retired. Resource Reclaim Pointer (RRP) 317 points to the last retired instruction and trails CSN. A "retired instruction" is an instruction that has completed execution, been deactivated, and committed by the CPU 51 and has had all associated machine resources reclaimed for subsequent use during subsequent instruction issue. Reclaimed machine resources include renamed and/or remapped logical, architectural, and physical registers allocated to the instruction, instruction serial numbers (SN), checkpoints, and watchpoints which are freed at instruction retirement and thereby made available for reallocation during subsequent instruction issue. The amount that RRP advances every machine cycle sets the maximum instruction retirement rate of the machine. When the CPU is initialized RRP is initialized to 0 (zero) and advanced according to changes in instruction status and predetermined RRP advancement rules described hereinafter. Allocation and deallocation of checkpoints and watchpoints, are described in detail hereinafter.

As instructions are committed, Resource Reclaim Pointer (RRP) 317 is advanced behind CSN 316 to retire instructions so that machine resources can be freed up and reclaimed for reuse. Each machine cycle, RRP 317 attempts to advanced past committed instructions based on the A-ring A-bit state and predetermined RRP advancement rules without passing CSN. RRP cannot pass CSN because machine resources allocated to non-committed instructions, even if deactivated, cannot be freed until it is certain that the instruction need not be undone. Instruction completion (deactivation) alone is not sufficient for instruction commitment or retirement because the deactivated instruction may still be speculative. Only committed instructions can be retired. RRP 317 points to the next instruction who's register resources can be reclaimed. RRP 317 advances based only on the set or cleared condition of bits in A-ring 312, CSN 316, and predetermined rules which may be implemented within CSN/RRP Advancement Logic 328.

As was the case for ISN and CSN, the maximum number of positions RRP can advance every machine cycle may be limited to a smaller maximum number of instructions per cycle by other software, hardware, or other controls. In one embodiment of the invention, the advancement of RRP is limited by a predetermined maximum instruction retirement rate that is selected based on the desire to limit the hardware required to implement movement of the RRP pointer. For example, in the exemplary four issue per cycle CPU embodiment, RRP advancement and therefore recovery of resources is limited to a maximum of four instructions points machine cycle. This is equal to the maximum instruction issue rate of the exemplary machine so it does not limit CPU 51 performance. RRP should not be restricted to advance more slowly than the normal issue rate. More rigorously, RRP is advanced according to the relationship: "RRP-min(RRP+4, CSN)." In principle limiting resource recovery in this manner is not essential, and RRP may be advanced up to CSN. The limitations in the exemplary CPU 51 were imposed because of hardware design tradeoffs. The hardware required to advance CSN for a predetermined number of instructions is greater than that required to advance RRP for the same number of instructions. Therefore, to minimize hardware to a desired level, RRP is advanced more slowly than CSN with little or no detrimental effect on performance.

1. Updates to RRF and Register Rename Maps at Instruction Commitment and Retirement

Referring to FIG. 18, resource recovery frees up instruction serial numbers so they can be used again and, as a result, also frees some registers so that they can be put back into the freelists within Freelist Unit 700. When instructions are committed, they are identified by the COMMIT₋₋ VALID signal generated by the ICRU 301. In response to the COMMIT₋₋ VALID signal, the entries in the storage unit 366 of RRF 302 that correspond to the committed instructions are freed by the control logic 365 for reuse.

2. Reading RRF at Instruction Retirement

RRP is read when an instruction is retired (See ICRU 301 description) and at machine Backup (See Backtrack description). When an instruction is retired, as indicated by the RRP pointer, the control logic 365 controls the storage unit 366 to output to the Freelist Unit 700, in the form of the FREE₋₋ TAG signal, the physical register tags corresponding to the retired instruction. The Freelist Unit then places the physical register tags in its list of free physical register tags.

3. Precise State Maintenance Using Pointers

A-Ring 312 and its associated logic provides accurate machine cycle current information on the status of each instructions that has been issued. Pointers ISN and CSN track status of issued and active instructions. Only when CSN advances to a particular instruction can the CPU 51 be certain that the instruction can be committed and free resources associated with executing the instruction, thereby presewing precise state. ISN moves around the A-ring setting A-bits (A=1) for issued instructions as it passes entries. CSN follows ISN looking for completed instructions (A=0) to commit. NMCSN follows ISN looking for completed (deactivated) memory instructions (M=0). RRP follows CSN around A-ring 312 and reclaims resources of committed instructions. When aggressive load/store instructions scheduling is discussed, that description will describe how NMCSN follows ISN looking for completed (deactivated) memory instructions (M=0).

CSN doesn't advance into an instruction that has an A-bit set. (NMCSN advances past memory refererring instructions because the M-bit is cleared at issue for memory referencing instructions.) Other rules for moving the pointers that permit precise state to be maintained are: (1) CSN can't advance past ISN (ISN≧CSN), (2) CSN can't advance past NMCSN (NMCSN≧CSN), (3) CSN can't advance past PBSN (PBSN≧CSN), (4) NMCSN can't advance into ISN (ISN≧NMCSN), (5) PBSN can't advance into ISN (ISN≧PBSN), (6) RRP can't advance past CSN (CSN≧RRP), (7) NISN is always ISN+1 (addition is modulo ring length), and (8) ISN can't catch up to RRP or CSN indicating a full machine condition). Other rules that may optionally be implemented in a preferred implementation of the method are (9) CSN and NMCSN can advance by at most eight in one clock cycle, and (10) RRP can advance by at most four in one machine clock cycle. The symbol "≧" indicates that the greater than or equal to relationship is determined with respect to the wrap around A-ring structure rather than strict mathematical equality or inequality.

Several observations may be made relative to the ISN, CSN, and RRP pointers: First, instructions having serial numbers between CSN and ISN correspond to outstanding active instructions in the machine. These instructions are speculative and may need to be undone. Second, instructions between CSN and RRP correspond to unretired instructions which have been committed and are simply awaiting retirement by RRP. These committed instructions will never be undone. Third, CSN can never pass ISN since it is not possible to commit the result of an instruction that has not issued. Fourth, machine "sync" is reached by definition when CSN=ISN=RRP so that all issued (ISN) instructions in the machine have been committed (CSN) and retired (RRP). Fnth, ISN can never pass RRP in the conceptually circular A-ring and the serial numbers between RRP and ISN are available for instruction issue. When ISN=RRP-1 (modulo A-ring length), all instruction serial numbers have been allocated and the machine must stall (wait) until RRP can advance to reclaim machine resources for reuse before another instruction is issued. Of course the CPU 51 continues to execute, deactivate, complete, and commit instructions that had been issued prior to the stall. Finally, the relative relationship among the three pointers is RRP≦⊙CSN≦⊙ISN, where the "≦⊙" operator indicates an ordering within the circular A-RING (modulo A-ring length) and does not imply a strict mathematical relationship. FIG. 20 is a diagrammatic flow-chart of an embodiment of the inventive method for maintaining precise state including instruction issue, deactivation, commit, and retirement.

III. AGGRESSIVE LONG LATENCY (LOADISTORE) INSTRUCTION SCHEDULING

The description of the inventive method of using various pointers to track and schedule instruction commitment and retirement pertain to all instruction types and provides many advantages in modern speculative out-of-order processors. Further benefits are attainable by recognizing that many modern processors have been designed as "load-store" architectures in which only load instructions and store instructions reference external memory, while all other instructions or operations reference registers within the processor.

Actually, load and store instructions belong to a more general class of instructions that are referred to here long latency instructions that require several machine cycles to complete, and include external memory referencing instructions of which load instructions and store instructions are two types. Instructions that reference internal registers generally require fewer or perhaps only a single machine cycle to complete. Long latency instructions also include "atomic" instructions which are instructions designed to execute in multiple-machine cycles without interruption.

Latency is the elapsed time between issuing an instruction and execution completion of that instruction. An instruction set for a load-store architecture is desirable because it decouples long latency memory references (such load-store references to memory) from short latency logical or arithmetic operations (such as add, multiply, divide, logical compare, and the like) that reference internal CPU 51 registers. Additionally, most modem CPU 51 of the designed with load-store type architectures have many general purpose registers which can support the increased register requirements that arise from this type of instruction set.

Both load instructions and store instructions modify architectural state. In an out-of-order execution processor, it is important to be able to schedule load and store instructions effectively in order to maintain a high load/store bandwidth without compromising precise state. An enhancement to the basic structure and method for tracking instruction status is provided that aggressively schedules long latency instructions while maintaining precise state. Structures and methods within the ICRU 301 of PSU 300 cooperate with structures and methods within the DFB 62 particularly the Load/Store Unit (LSU) 603 as will be described to provide the enhanced capabilities.

A. Memory Instruction Status Information Storage

The inventive structure and method provides additional signals that distinguish long latency instructions, storage regions for storing long latency instruction status information, and painters for tracking the instruction status. FIG. 21 shows a conceptual diagram of Memory Instruction Ring (M-ring) 324 for storing long latency instructions status information, typically memory referencing instructions (e.g. Load/Store instructions), in relationship with Active Instruction Ring 311 already described. M-ring 324 has generally the same structure and overall characteristics as A-ring 311 but the Memory status bits are set according to a different set of rules than the A-Ring status bits. In particular, M-ring 324 implements different rules concerning which instructions or instruction types are treated as active (bit set to "1 ") or inactive (bit cleared to "0") at issue.

As shown in FIG. 10, when ISU 200 issues an instruction, it provides an instruction type signal ISSUE₋₋ MEM which distinguishes between a memory referencing instruction and non-memory referencing instructions, along with the ISSUE₋₋ NOP and ISSUE₋₋ VALID already described. ISSUE₋₋ MEM could also be generated so that it signals any particular class of long latency instructions that would benefit from being aggressively scheduled, including load instructions, store instructions, atomic instruction sequences, and other instructions referencing memory.

In one embodiment of the CPU 51, ISSUE₋₋ MEM is a four-bit vector (each bit corresponding to one of the issuable instructions in the instruction issue window) where assertion ("1") at bit indicates that i-th instruction is memory-related. ISSUE₋₋ MEM is used by M-Ring Set Logic 335 within ICRU 301 to set bits in M-Ring 324 at issue as shown in FIG. 12. Address decoding logic 338, 336 are provided within A-Ring 312. ISSUE₋₋ MEM indicates whether or not the issued instructions are related to memory operations. If ISSUE₋₋ MEM from ISU 200 is asserted at bit i, and ISSUE₋₋ VALID corresponding to the same instruction slot is asserted, then that particular M-bit is not set in the Memory Instruction Ring (M-Ring) 324. Not setting M-bit when the instruction is memory related permits the memory related instruction to be effectively "deactivated" at the time it is issued so that a Non-Memory Committed Instruction Serial Number (NMCSN) painter (described hereinafter) advances over the cleared M-bits and is prevented from advancing by non-memory referencing instructions in the manner that CSN advances over leared A-Ring bits. An M-bit must be written as either a "0" or "1" for every instance when ISSUE₋₋ VALID is "1 ", that is for every issued instruction whether memory related or not. Not setting the M-bit for a memory operation facilitates "ignoring" memory related operations for the purpose of advancing NMCSN.

M-bits are cleared by M-Ring Clear Legii: 337 when an instruction completes without error just as they are cleared for A-ring 312. Memory referencing instructions having their M-bit cleared at issue remain cleared after instruction deactivation. M-Ring bits are cleared for execution traps in the same manner as for A-Ring 312. M-ring 324 status information is used to track and aggressively schedule memory referencing instructions. The overall status of memory referencing instructions, including issued, committed, retired status are still maintained by A-ring 311 and its associated pointers.

In light of the described similar tales between the A-ring and the M-ring, those skilled in the art will realize that the function of the A-ring and M-ring could be implemented within a single data structure, such as a single circular ring wherein each addressable location of the ring comprises a plurality of bits. In such a plurality-bit ring, both instruction activity (active or inactive) and instruction type (memory, non-memory, branch, nop, and the like) could be encoded in the plurality of bits. Furthermore, other coding schemes could be provided to store the same information as presently provided in separate A-ring and M-ring data structures. Those of ordinary skill in the art, in light of the present description, will also appreciate how the ring set and clear logic, how CSN/RRP logic for a multi-bit circular ring would be modified to support the multi-bit format, and to accommodate NMCSN and that different logic states or symbols may be implemented other than a "1" for set and a "0" for clear to differentiate between active and inactive and between a memory instruction and a non-memory instruction.

B. NMCSN and PBSN pointers for Tracking and scheduling Long-Latency Information

So far, the structure and method for setting M-bits in M-ring 324 has been described. In the structure and method of the present invention a Predicted Branch Instruction Serial Number (PBSN) 318 pointer and a Non-Memory Committed Serial Number (NMCSN) pointer 319 are provided and Used in conjunction with M-ring 324 to enable the CPU 51 to effectively and aggressively schedule long latency instructions, particularly load/store instructions referencing external memory. Both NMCSN and PBSN are stored in Pointer Register 313 within ICRU 301 as described.

NMCSN 319 points to the last "committed" instruction (as defined previously), but since M-bits for memory referencing instructions are cleared at the time of instruction issue, all memory access instructions are effectively ignored in M-ring 324 for the purposes of advancing NMCSN, therefore NMCSN advances more rapidly. Note that only advancement of pointer CN 316 actually commits instructions. NMCSN is used only by Load/Store Unit 603 as will be described hereinafter. An instruction can be committed if it has completed without error and all prior instructions have been completed without error. NMCSN can advance past memory refererring instructions even if the memory referencing instructions are still active. This method may also be used to aggressively schedule other long latency instruction types that do not reference memory. When the CPU is initialized, NMCSN is initialized to 0 (zero).

PBSN 318 is the serial number of the earliest (oldest) unresolved predicted branch instruction. In the present exemplary embodiment, PBSN is determined by Watchpoint Unit 304. (Watchpoint Unit 304 is described in greater detail elsewhere in this specification.) An unresolved branch instruction is an instruction (and instruction sequence spawned from that instruction) that has been speculatively issued, begun executing, and possibly even completed execution before it is known for certain that the instruction should have been issued and executed. In other words, the conditions that would make execution of the instruction appropriate have not yet arisen in the processing flow at the time the instruction is issued. In the present inventive structure and method, whenever there are no active unresolved predicted branch instructions PBSN is made equal to ISN. PBSN is used in NMCSN advancement logic as a barrier to NMCSN advancement. NMCSN can never advance beyond the SN address of pointer PBSN or ISN, and in situations where there are no memory instructions, pointer NMCSN is equal to CSN. When the CPU is initialized PBSN is initialized to 0 (zero).

C. Advancing NMCSN

NMCSN 319 is the memory-related operations counterpart of the CSN 316. In correspondence of A-ring for advancing CSN, there is an M-ring for advancing the NMCSN. The M-ring consists of 64 bits of M bits in a wrap-around manner. That is for the exemplary 64 bit M-ring, the bit following M-bit #63 is M-bit #0. An M-bit=0 means that the corresponding instruction is a long-latency instruction such as a memory-related instruction, for example, a load/store instruction.

In an exemplary CPU, the rule to advance the NMCSN pointer is similar to that of CSN as shown below. (1) Advance NMCSN up to, inclusive, ISN; (2) Advance NMCSN no more than eight instruction serial number in one cycle; (3) Advance up to, exclusive, the first "1" in the M-ring.

The rule for advancing NMCSN is modified when an "unfinished floating point operation" exception occurs in the floating-point unit (FPU) or a "data breakpoint exception" is detected from the load/store execution unit (LSU). In these two instances NMCSN is advanced by one serial number just as for CSN previously described. That is CSN←CSN+1, and NMCSN←NMCSN+1 under these conditions. PSU 300 is particularly concerned about unfinished floating-point operations and data breakpoint operation which require special pointer handling.

The implementation of the M-ring can be similar to that of A-ring. In fact, in the exemplary CPU, since NMCSN can only be advanced to the maximum(8, ISN, the next M-bit=1) simple hardware circuitry may be implemented to move NMCSN to the proper position as for CSN. (The expression "maximum (x, y, z)" means select the maximum value from among the values of parameters or expressions x, y, and z.) M-ring 324 can be implemented as eight 8-bit registers. At the M-ring read port 346 of these eight 8-bit registers, the registers of the surrounding NMCSN are read out and the content of these registers when read is brought into two separate 8-bit buses. Concatenating these buses into a 16-bit bus then shifting the bus by from 0-bits to 8-bits forms an 8-bit window of interest for advancing the old NMCSN. A "finding the first 1" circuit will yield the amount that NMCSN shall advance.

Correct maintenance of NMCSN and PBSN permits simple determination of the load/store or other memory referencing instructions that can be selected for execution without compromising precise state. Load/store instructions which can be selected for execution without compromising precise state are considered to be "in-range" for execution. Recall that precise state is maintained when (1) an instruction which generates an exception does not modify architectural state, (2) all instructions prior to the faulting instruction have completed modifications to architectural state, and (3) all instructions after the faulting instruction have not modified architectural state. LSU 603 also receives NMCSN 319 from ICPU 301 and PBSN 318 from Watchpoint Unit 304 to dse in scheduling the long latency instructions.

D. Load-Store Unit (LSU) within Data Flow Block

While implementation of several of the invention features of the invention pertain to general execution units, aggressive scheduling of Long Latency instructions benefits when particular structures are present to support the Long Latency in state schedule. For example, structures for aggressively scheduling load/store and other memory referencing instructions are provided. Those having ordinary skill in the art will, in light of the disclosure, appreciate how such testers cold be implemented in other execution units not dedicated to local store operations.

The LSU supports beth Relaxed Memory Model (RMO) and Total Store Ordering (TSO) modes that are defined in the SPARC-V9 Architecture Manual. The LSU is responsible for scheduling of both fixed and floating point Load/Store instructions. The LSU can make up to two requests each cycle to the Cache. Instruction ordering required to maintain precise state is managed by a set of protocol signals between the processor and the cache chips. The LSU contains a 12-entry reservation station. In RMO mode, load instructions are allowed to specularely bypass store instructions. There is a three stage pipeline between the LSU and the Data Caches that supports split transactions. In the first stage, an instruction's address, opcode, and serial number are sent to the Data Caches. Also sent are some control bits used for speculative execution. In the second stage, a store instruction's data is sent-from the LSU to the Data Caches. Also in the second stage, the Data Caches send beck to the LSU the serial number and valid bit of the instruction that is going to complete in the next cycle. In the third stage, the Data Caches return the status and load data. On a cache miss, the Data Cache will return the data during an unused pipeline slot or it will assert a signal which opens up a pipeline slot for the data.

FIG. 22 shows a functional block diagram of Load/Store Unit (LSU) 603 which comprises Selection & Execution Control Logic Unit 609, and Instruction/Data Queue (IDQ) 610 for storing a variety of instruction and data related information, and Decode & Field Separation Logic (SSFSL) 620 for decoding signals from ISU 200, FPU 600, FXU 601, and FXAGU 602. More particularly, IDQ 610 comprises In-Range Bit field 611, Opcode filed 612, Instruction Serial Number (SN) filed 613, Checkpoint Number 614, Validity Bit filed 615, Attribute (ATR) field 616, Register Tag (TAGS) field 617, Tag Valid Field (TV) 618, Address field 619, Address Valid (AV) field 620, and Cache Data Field 621. Data cache 52 sends and receives addresses and data with IDQ 610.

When the LSU 603 receives an instruction, the decode and field separation logic 622 decodes it and determines whether the address will be contained in the immediate data field of the instruction, or whether the FXAGU 602 will have to compute the address. If the decode logic 622 determines that the address has to be computed by the FXAGU 602, then it clears the address valid bit. But, if it decides that the address is contained within the instruction, meaning that its immediate data within the instruction, then it sets the address valid bit to indicate flat the address data is ready and available for the instruction, and that the instruction can be executed. Tags coming from the FPU and the FXU are handled in the some manner, so that the tag signals indicate whether the data is valid or not. The issued valid signal when the instruction gets stored in the reservation station or queue 610, the valid signal is cleared (not asserted) until the issued valid signal indicates that it was actually issued.

When the LSU 603 executes the instruction, it sends the data to the data cache 52 directly. When it is retrieving data from data cache 52, the data in our implementation is shown going into the selection and execution control logic which then sends out a signal containing the tag sends and the data valid bit indicating that the data is valid and it also sends out the data as we show it, so there are combined signals that come out. These are the FP₋₋ TAGS₋₋ DV₋₋ F signal, and the FP₋₋ DATA₋₋ F signals in FIG. 22.

The Selection Execution Control Logic 609 also gets access information and gives access information to the data cache 52. Some of that information will be trap information, the type of traps that are associated with memory operation, and outputs error signals (ERRSTAT) for use by PSU 300 in error detection.

Selection & Execution Control Logic Unit (SECLU) 609 is responsible for selecting instructions for execution in LSU. It deals with ordering constraints of loads, stores, atomic operations, and the like. For example, a younger load to address "X" cannot pass an older store to address "X". This type of load is marked as "strong" in the Attributes Array like a store. It initiates stores "in-order" and a store cannot be initiated until all previous loads and stores have completed. Finally, a store's serial number must be in-range. SECLU 609 contains logic that masks only the instructions that are valid, eligible (i.e. not currently being processed by the cache), have all of there depandendes met, and are a "weak" operation (e.g. a load) or are "in-range" and not constrained by a previous cache miss. The masked instructions are then processed by Precedence Matrix 623 which selects the oldest instructions from the set of instructions that meet the mask logic criteria.

SECLU 609 is also responsible for controlling a memory access. It sends commands to the caches and receives cache status information on completion of the access. It also puts the proper destination register tags on "load" data from the cache and keep attack of the attributes of an access in Attribute Array 616. These attributes include in-range, weak/strong (generally stores and atomics are "strong" and loads are "weak"), speculative access, and eligible to send to cache.

SSFSL 620 receives Instruction Packets from ISU 200 which include instruction op-code, instruction serial number, instruction checkpoint, and register tags, and decodes the information, selects the correct slot in IDQ 610 to store the information, and separates the information into the proper field. Each serial number entry and data associated with the SN is stored into an empty slot in the queue.

SECLU also receives pointer values (ISN, NISN, CSN, PBSN, and NMCSN) from PSU 300. CSN, PBSN, and NMCSN are particularly relevant to determining if the instruction serial number is in-range. SECLU 609 includes the logic that determines if an access "in-range," that is if the serial number is greater than CSN and less than or equal to NMCSN as described. In-range information is forwarded to Attributes Array 616 and stored in in-range file 611 within SECLU. SECLU also contains logic to match an entry stored in the IDQ with data returning status and/or data from the cache for a given access. All valid entries within IDQ are monitored to see if they are in-range during that cycle and the attributes array is updated as required. Once a queue entry is in-range, it remains in-range until the queue entry is reused.

Checkpoint Field 614 contains the checkpoint number that corresponds to the access in a queue slice. New checkpoint number(s) can arrive from ISB 61 each cycle. Valid Bit Queue 615 holds a validity bit that is set if a memory access instruction is actually issued. This information comes from the ISB 61 during the instruction issue cycle. The bits can be reset if accesses are killed by the ISB. Address field 618 holds the addresses for all cache accesses. The serial number arrives in the IDQ address match logic before the address arrives in the Address Queue from the DFB 62 Address Generation Unit (FXAGU) 602. Attributes may be set in the Attributes Array 616 in response to the content of the control registers. For example, if the Program Order bit is set, then the "strong" bit will be set in the attributes section.

1. Identifying In-Range Memory Referencing (long Latency) Instructions

As described, SECLU 609 contains logic that determines whether an instruction is "in-range" in response to CSN and NMCSN from ICRU 301 and PBSN form Watchpoint Unit 304. The logic identifies instructions in a first-window having serial numbers between CSN and PBSN (CSN≦first-window PBSN) can be executed without concern for branch mispredicts, where the symbol "≦" indicates relative order in the Memory Instruction Ring rather than strict mathematical order. Instructions in a second, and possibly smaller "in-range" window having serial numbers between CSN≦ and NMCSN (CSN≦in-range≦NMCSN≦PBSN) can be scheduled for execution without concern for branch mispredicts or execution exceptions. It is the memory referencing instructions that are "in-range" that can be identified to LSU 200 within DFB 62 for aggressive execution scheduling. FIG. 23 is a diagrammatic flow-chart of an embodiment of the inventive method for aggressively scheduling long latency instructions including load/store instructions while maintaining precise state.

2. Enhancement to the Basic Structure and Method For Aggressive Long Latency (Load/Store) Instruction Scheduling

In an enhancement to the basic method of the invention, rules can be implemented so that NMCSN ignores predetermined instructions known to be "non-faulting" instructions for purposes of advancement of the NMCSN pointer and improve performance by permitting an even more aggressive scheduling of load/store and other instructions that reference memory.

IV. CHECKPOINTING

A Checkpoint is a "snapshot" of the machine state at known instant of time. Checkpoints provide method and structure for quickly restoring an earlier machine state to undo a speculative instruction sequence in the event of a mispredicted branch or execution exception. In an exemplary processor according to the present invention, checkpoints are made during the instruction issue cycle. In the present inventive method, the restoration of machine state based on restoration of a checkpoint is defined as a machine "backup."

In the present invention, checkpoints are created for several classes of instructions: (1) predicted program control transfer instructions such as branches and (2) instructions that may have the side-effect of modifying control register values.

Control transfer instructions (such as branches) are predicted and may result in program counter (PC) discontinuities. In the CPU 51 implementing the inventive structure and method, the processor makes a checkpoint for each predicted program control instruction in order to provide a quick machine backup if that program control instruction (branch or return type jump and link) is mispredicted. If the APC and NAPC values were not saved in these circumstances, it would be difficult to reconstruct the correct FPC, APC, and NAPC values without re-issue and re-execution of the program control instruction that was mispredicted. Since a checkpoint is created for each such program control instruction, the maximum number of checkpoints allowed in the machine limits the number of program control instructions which may be predicted and remain unresolved concurrently. The predicted program control instructions may be those such as the SPARC-V9 BPr, FBcc, FBPcc, Bcc, BPcc, and JMPL[rd=0] instructions described earlier.

Other types of instructions that result in program flow changes may also be checkpointe. These may include SPARC-V9 instructions such as CALL, JMPL, TCC, RETURN, DONE, and RETRY.

Checkpoints are also created for instructions that modify machine state including instructions which may have the side-effect of modifying control register values. Checkpointing certain control registers, allows the control registers to be modified speculatively. These include writes to the control registers in the control register file 800, such as the SPARC-V9 WRPR and WRASR instructions, and include register window control instructions, such as the SPARC-V9 SAVED, RESTORED, and FLUSHW instructions. However, not all control registers are checkpointed in order to reduce the amount of checkpointed state, without loosing performance.

Moreover, in the exemplary CPU 51, reads of control registers in the control register file 800 require checkpoints since, as described earlier, their data is stored in the watch point unit 30,so that it can then be made available to the FXU 601 for execution at a later time. These may be instructions such as the SPARC-V9 RDPR and RDASR instructions.

Furthermore, instructions which often result in an issue trap may require a checkpoint. These include window control instructions such as the SPARC-V9 SAVE and RESTORE instructions and unimplemented instructions, which for example, may be the SPARC-V9 LDD/LDDA and STD/STDA instructions.

Traps may also be entered speculatively and when so issued are checkpointed. Thus, checkpoints may be made for the issued instruction prior to an instruction that causes an execution trap (etrap) or issue trap in the manner described later. Moreover, checkpoints are made prior to the first instruction in a trap handling routine so that return can be made if the trap was taken speculatively.

For instructions which have side-effects which cannot be controlled speculatively, or instructions which so rarely cause exceptions and require large amounts of checkpoint information, a decision may be made not to checkpoint the instruction for reasons of efficiency, but instead to force a "syncing" of the machine prior to issue. That is, prior to issuing an instruction that has side-effects which cannot be controlled speculatively, the CPU must be at machine sync, meaning that all pending instructions have committed and been retired (ISN=CSN=RRP).

An important performance/design trade-off is made in the choice of which instructions are to be designated as machine syncing instructions and which instructions are to be checkpointed. The performance degradation for syncing is weighed against the additional logic complexity and processor area that would be associated with handling such instructions speculatively, including the chip area required for storing the checkpointed machine state.

Many different types of instructions modify data values in registers. Conventional checkpointing methods checkpoint register data values in order to restore register state. By comparison, in a machine implementing the method of the present invention, the CPU 51 is able to restore earlier register state without checkpointing actual register data values by instead checkpointing the register rename maps. Checkpointing the "register rename map" rather than the "register data values" is advantageous because it drastically reduces the amount of checkpointed state information stored in the CPU 51.

In the exemplary machine, supporting 64 concurrent instruction up to sixteen Checkpoints are available at any given time. In the exemplary embodiment, ISU 200 is limited (by hardware considerations) to allocating at most one checkpoint per issue cycle; however, in general, one or any plurality of checkpoints may be allocated in a cycle. Predetermined rules have also been implemented in the exemplary CPU 51, to restrict the types and combinations of instructions that may be issued during the same machine cycle. For example, in the exemplary CPU, only one control transfer instruction may be issued during a single machine cycle, so that only a single checkpoint is needed to save state for that cycle. This checkpoint limitation means that in some cases (depending on what type instructions are waiting in the issue window) the maximum number of instructions (e.g. 4) cannot be issued during the cycle. More or fewer checkpoint can be provided, the number being selected based on such factors as the number instructions requiring checkpointing that will be outstanding concurrently in the machine.

In the exemplary embodiment, Active Instruction Ring 312 supports as many as sixty-four instructions concurrently. As described hereinafter, the inventive structure and method provides for certain instruction types to be checkpointed, and optionally provides for checkpointing arbitrary instruction types at predetermined instruction cycle time-out intervals in response to a TIMEOUT₋₋ CHKPNT signal from ISU 200. Therefore, the number of checkpoints supported need be no greater than the number of instructions supported by Active Instruction Ring 312 and the number may generally be fewer. In the exemplary CPU 51, sixteen checkpoints are allocatable and each of these checkpoints is a machine resource that is recovered after the instruction causing the checkpoint is retired.

In the exemplary CPU 51, checkpoint data (the machine state) is saved locally throughout the CPU 51 in checkpoint storage units in response to the DO₋₋ CHKPT signals to cut down on chip routing and to improve performance. However, those skilled in the art will recognize that the checkpointed data could be stored off chip.

Each of the checkpoint storage units has 16 addressable storage elements or entries. Each storage entry corresponds to one of the 16 checkpoint numbers described later. Thus, referring to FIG. 6, the contents of the APC and NAPC registers 113 and 114 (CHKPT₋₋ PC and CHKPT₋₋ NPC) are stored in the PC checkpoint storage unit 107 by the PC logic 106 in response to the DO₋₋ CHKPT signal. Similarly, the control register contents (CHKPT₋₋ CNTRL₋₋ REG) are stored in the control register checkpoint storage unit 817 by the control logic 816, as shown in FIG. 17. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 16, data representing the rename maps (CHKPT₋₋ MAP) of each of the FXRFRN 604, the CCRFRN 610, and the FPRFRN 605 are stored in a checkpoint storage unit 616 and data representing the freelist (CHKPT₋₋ FREELIST) of the freelist logic 701 are stored in the freelist checkpoint storage unit 702. And, as will be described later, certain contents of the trap stack unit 815 are also checkpointed.

The ISU 200 is responsible for determining when a checkpoint is to be formed. I does so by decoding the fetched instructions it receives from the BRB 59 to determine if any are of the type just described that need to be checkpointed. And, as explained later, it also determines when to form a checkpoint when the PSU 300 indicates with the TIMEOUT₋₋ CHKPT signal that a checkpoint should be made after the occurrence of a predetermined number of machine cycles. As a result, the ISU 200 generates DO₋₋ CHKPT signals which indicate that a checkpoint is to be formed and specify the checkpoint number (explained in greater detail later) for the checkpoint.

FIG. 24 is a functional block diagram of Checkpoint Unit 303 within PSU 300. Assertion by ISU 200 of DO₋₋ CHKPNT signals instructs Checkpoint (CKPT) 303 to make checkpoint(s) for one or more instructions, and which of the instructions issued in instruction slot(s)0-3 required the checkpoint. Since no checkpoints can be allocated unless at least one free checkpoint register is available, CKPT 303 must send a CHKPT₋₋ AVAIL signal to ISU 200. CHKPT₋₋ AVAIL which informs ISU that at least one checkpoint is available for allocation, and informs ISU of the checkpoint number so that the checkpoint number can be associated with each instruction and incorporated into the checkpoint number (CHKPTs) formed by ISU 200 and forwarded to DFB 62. These signals would precede the DO₋₋ CHKPNT signal issue by ISU 200. If no checkpoints are available for allocation, instruction issue by ISU stalls until checkpoint resources become available. In simplified terms, stored checkpoints are only used if it is necessary to recover from execution exceptions or mispredictions, otherwise they are deallocated and the storage space freed for reuse. (Allocation and deallocation of machine resources, including checkpoints, is described in detail hereinafter.) In an enhancement to the basic inventive structure and method, described hereinafter, timeout checkpoints are also formed independent of the decoded instruction type when a predetermined number of machine cycles or alternating a predetermined number of instructions have issued, have expired without checkpoint formation.

Checkpoint Unit 303 keeps track of the checkpoints, allocates checkpoints when ISU 200 instructs it to, and frees checkpoints where they are no longer needed. If the Committed Serial Number is greater than the Serial Number (CSN>SN) of checkpoint i+1, then checkpoint i can be retired because in accordance with the inventive method and structure that permits restoring machine state at any instruction boundary, it is never necessary to backtrack the machine to an instruction sequentially earlier than a committed instruction. PSU 300 also instructs the rest of the system when it allocates or frees a checkpoint so those system components can reuse their local data storage areas used for the retired checkpoint. Checkpoint Unit 303 also tells ISU 200 how many checkpoints are free for allocation. The use of Checkpoints are described in greater detail with respect to the Backup--and Backstep--Units hereinafter.

Checkpoint 303 has five main functions: First, it controls the allocation of checkpoints, as requested by ISU 200 through the maintenance of a list of checkpoint data register structures (CHKPNT₋₋ REG₋₋ within Checkpoint Register Unit 352 in response to DO₋₋ CHKPNT signals from ISU 200. DO₋₋ CHKPNT specifies that one or more checkpoints are to be formed and their respective checkpoint number location(s) (e.g. 0-15) when control transfer instructions are issued. In an enhancement to the inventive structure and method, TIMEOUT₋₋ CHKPT is generated by Checkpoint 303 and sent to the ISU 200 to form a checkpoint at predetermined timings relatively independent of instruction type as described hereinafter in an enhancement to the basic checkpointing method. This Timeout checkpoint is provided to establish and limit the maximum number of cycles it would take to undo the effects of instructions for which no checkpoints were formed. (Time-out checkpoint formation may be delayed or canceled when a checkpointable instruction type is to be issued in the same instruction window)

Second, checkpoint retires (clears) checkpoint(s) based on CSN advancement past a given checkpoint (n) and the temperally next checkpoint (n+1). The mechanism used to determine CSN has passed a specific checkpoint number is a comparison of CSN with the serial number stored in the checkpoint register. The serial number stored in the checkpoint register is the serial number of the instruction after the instruction that made the checkpoint. In response to ISN and CSN from ICRU 301. For example, checkpoint n can be retired only if CSN has advanced past checkpoints n and n+1.

Third, Checkpoint 303 indicates to ISU 200 what is the next checkpoint that should be allocated through the signal CHKPT₋₋ AVAIL sent to ISU 200, including whether checkpoints are available for allocation by ISU and the checkpoint location number(s). Fourth, Checkpoint 303 stores instruction serial numbers (SN) corresponding to an allocated checkpoint, and provides both SN and SN+1 associated with a checkpoint when requested by other units particularly to ICRU 301. Fifth, it participates in executing machine Backups by generating an instruction kill vector (KILL₋₋ VEC) which indicates to Backup Unit 402 within Backtrack Unit 305 which of the outstanding valid checkpoints to kill, and by indicating to ICRU 301 by signals CHKPNT₋₋ SN and CHKPNT₋₋ SN₋₋ INC which checkpoints can be retired in conjunction with the machine backup. (Machine Backup is described in greater detail hereinafter.)

A. Structure of Checkpoint Allocation Register

Checkpoint Allocation Register 352 structure is shown diagrammatically in Table 1. The first six bits are status bits. Bit-V denotes the validity (allocation) of the checkpoint. Bit-CP (checkpoint passed) indicates whether CSN has passed the SN of this checkpoint, Q denotes one of the 5 states to keep track of CSN advancement, and GT (greater than) indicates whether CSN is greater than the serial number of the checkpoint at allocation. Bit-GT is used to determine when CSN has passed this checkpoint. On boot-up, bits V and CP should be set to zero except at Checkpoint location 0 where Bit-V is set to "1" and Bit CP is set to "0" for proper functionality. The NSN field indicates the next serial number following the checkpointed serial number. In this implementation, a checkpoint number is not saved, rather setting the V-bit in the checkpoint data structure for location "i" indicates that checkpoint "i" has been allocated. The possible states for the checkpoint register (CHKPNT₋₋ REG₋₋) are described in Table 2.

In the exemplary CPU, Bit-Q is reset to either `000` or `001` during checkpoint allocation. Bit-Q changes state based on CSN advancement around A-ring 312. Table 3 show Q-bit states and transition.

                  TABLE 1                                                          ______________________________________                                         Structure of Exemplary Checkpoint Allocation Registers                         (CHKPNT.sub.-- REG.sub.-- i).                                                  i     1-bit      1-bit  3-bit    1-bit                                                                               6-bit                                    ______________________________________                                         0     V          CP     Q        GT   NSN                                      1     V          CP     Q        GT   NSN                                      .     .          .      .        .    .                                        .     .          .      .        .    .                                        .     .          .      .        .    .                                        14    V          CP     Q        GT   NSN                                      15    V          CP     Q        GT   NSN                                      ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE 2                                                          ______________________________________                                         Possible States for Exemplary Checkpoint Register                              (CHKPNT.sub.-- REG.sub.-- i).                                                  V   CP    GT    Description                                                    ______________________________________                                         0   X     X     Checkpoint has not been allocated. CP and GT are not                           valid. CP is always set to zero if the checkpoint is not                       active.                                                        1   0     0     Checkpoint has been allocated. CSN is less than this                           checkpoint serial number at allocation, and CSN has not                        yet advanced past the checkpoint.                              1   0     1     Checkpoint has been allocated. CSN is greater than the                         checkpoint serial number at allocation, and CSN has not                        yet advanced past the checkpoint.                              1   1     X     Checkpoint has been allocated. CSN has passed the                              checkpoint. GT is not valid (don't care). If the next                          checkpoint is also in "11X" state, then this checkpoint                        can                                                                            be retired.                                                    ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE 3                                                          ______________________________________                                         Exemplary Q-bit States and Transitions                                         Q-State                                                                              State Description                                                        ______________________________________                                         000   Initial state of a currently formed checkpoint if 0 < CSN < 32                 during checkpoint allocation.                                            001   Initial state of a currently formed checkpoint for 31 < CSN < 64               during checkpoint allocation.                                            010   State of a checkpoint where CSN has advanced across the 63/0                   boundary once since allocation.                                          011   State of a checkpoint where CSN has advanced across the 63/0                   boundary twice since allocation.                                         1XX   State of a checkpoint where CSN has advanced across the 63/0                   boundary twice, and CSN is currently less than 32. X indicates                 don't care.                                                              ______________________________________                                    

B. Checkpoint Allocation

On allocation of a checkpoint for an instruction SN, Checkpoint Allocation Logic Unit 351 sends a signal to Checkpoint Register and Control Unit 352 which sets the V-bit to "1" in CHKPNT₋₋ REG₋₋ i to "1" to indicate that checkpoint "i" is valid and has not been required and sets the CP-bit to zero. The checkpoint which is to be allocated is determined in CAL 351 by the CHKPT₋₋ AVAIL signal sent to ISU 200 which tells ISU the next checkpoint number(s) available for allocation (CHKPNT₋₋ SN) and by DO₋₋ CHKPNT from ISU which includes a make checkpoint enable signal and identifies the instruction serial number for which the checkpoint is made (CHK₋₋ LOCATION). Bit-Q is written to indicate the location of CSN at the time the checkpoint is allocated as shown in Table 3 below. This information is used to detect CSN transition from around the ring (e.g. from location 63 back to location 0). The checkpoint which is allocated is determined by a signal DO₋₋ CHKPNT which identifies the checkpoint serial number and serves as an enable signal. In addition, the serial number corresponding to the checkpoint is calculated by Checkpoint Allocation Logic Unit 351 but only the serial number incremented by one (NSN=SN+1) is stored in the register. Serial number NSN is used in two different conditions. First, NSN becomes an incremented checkpoint serial number signal (CHKPNT₋₋ SN₋₋ INC) on dab bus to ICRU 301. Second, NSN is used to determine whether faulting instructions lie in the instruction slot following the checkpoint. Saving NSN (SN+1) rather than SN in the register saves logic and speeds up generation of signals that identify the serial number after the checkpoint. Alternatively, SN itself could be stored in the register and logic provided to generate the incremented serial number signal.

The following checkpoint allocation procedure is exemplary. If the make checkpoint signal is asserted (DO₋₋ CHKPNT), then the V-Bit field is set to "1" (CHKPNT₋₋ REG₋₋ [V₋₋ field]=1) and the CP₋₋ bit filed is cleared (CHKPNT₋₋ REG₋₋ i[CP₋₋ field]=0). Then the instruction serial number for which the checkpoint has been created is derived from the encoded four-bit checkpoint location vector and stored in the checkpoint serial number field (CHKPNT₋₋ REG₋₋ i[SN₋₋ field]). For example, in an embodiment of the CPU 51 `0000` designates checkpoint location NISN; `0001` designates NISN+1; `0011` designates NISN+2; `0111` designates NISN+3; and `1111` designates NISN+4.

C. Checkpoint Retirement

Checkpoints are cleared or retired in the Checkpoint Clear/Retirement Logic Unit 353. Checkpoint 303 will only require as many checkpoints per cycle as are requested by ISU 200. A checkpoint is retired by clearing the V-bit field in Registers 352 in response to CSN passing the current checkpoint (n) and the next checkpoint (n+1). Checkpoint Allocation Logic Unit 353 maintains a pointer called OLDEST₋₋ ACTIVE₋₋ CHECKPOINT which is used to point to the checkpoint which will be retired in Checkpoint register 352. The checkpoint retirement procedure is as follows. A signal called "CSN₋₋ PASSED" is generated in Retire Logic 353 by computing the difference between the serial number stored in the checkpoint (CKPSN) and the committed serial number (CSN) pointer (e.g. CKPSN-CSN). CSN is maintained in ICRU 301 and sent to Checkpoint Unit 303 each cycle. Checkpoints can only be retired when CSN advances past a given checkpoint (n) and the temporally next checkpoint (n+1), or if there is a machine backup past the checkpoint serial number.

In one embodiment of the inventive structure and method, CSN advancement past the checkpoints is determined by providing logic that simultaneously compares CSN with all checkpoint serial numbers. In making the comparison, the wrap around character of A-ring 312 is conskiered (modulo-ring length) so that simple greater than tests are may be Insufficient to determine whether CSN has passed a checkpoint serial number is some cases.

D. Checkpoint Maintenance On Machine Backup

In response to receiving WILL₋₋ BACKUP and BACKUP₋₋ CHECKPOINT signals from Backtrack 305 that tell Checkpoint Unit 303 to prepares a KILL₋₋ VEC signal for the beginning of the next machine cycle. KILL₋₋ VEC kills instructions that have not been committed. The instructions to be killed are derived from the BACKUP₋₋ CHECKPOINT signal which specifies the instruction serial number of the instruction at the checkpoint, and ISN which indicates the last committed instruction. All those instructions between CSN and the backup checkpoint will be killed.

In one embodiment of the CPU 51, BACKUP₋₋ CHECKPOINT is a signal generated by the Backup Unit 402 within Backtrack 305 and tells the CPU 51 which checkpoint to backup to in order to restore state. An instruction kill vector signal (KILL₋₋ VEC) is also generated by Backtrack to indicate which of the instructions between ISN and the backup checkpoint are to be killed. For example, the instruction kill vector may be a multi-hot signal with the hot bits identifying the instructions to be killed. Other signal forms may alternatively be used.

Checkpoint 303 provides checkpoint register information (CHKPNT₋₋ SN) that identifies the checkpoint serial number to ICRU 301 so that it can adjust ISN during a backup. Checkpoint Unit 303 also provides the serial number is used by ICRU 301 to adjust ISN when an unfinished floating-point exception or a data breakpoint exception are detected (CHKPNT₋₋ SN₋₋ INC).

E. Timeout Checkpoint Enhancement

In conventional checkpointing techniques, checkpoint is made based on decoded attributes of an instruction. Checkpoints are made only for certain instruction attributes so that the number of instructions between successive checkpoints (within a checkpoint boundary) is unbounded. When a instruction execution exception occurs, the CPU 51 may have to expend many machine cycles to restore CPU 51 state prior to the faulting instruction. As a consequence, the time the CPU 51 spends re-executing or undoing instructions before reaching the faulting instruction becomes a function of the instruction window size and the number of instructions within the checkpoint boundary. Instruction window size in this context means the maximum number of instruction allowed to be outstanding in the CPU 51 at any time. (In the exemplary CPU 51, up to sixty-four instructions may be outstanding in the machine at any time.)

In this enhancement to the inventive structure and method, a checkpoint is made, not based (only) on decoded instruction attributes, but rather (in addition) due to a timeout condition in the CPU 51. The timeout condition is based on the number of instruction issue cycles that have passed without forming a checkpoint. For example, no checkpoint has been formed because recently issued instructions have not been of the type that are conventionally checkpointed. Timeout checkpointing limits the maximum number of instructions within a checkpoint boundary. As long as the instruction window size is greater than the maximum number of instructions within a checkpoint boundary, the processor can restore checkpointed state faster than conventional instruction decode based checkpoint techniques in the event of an exception. Furthermore, the inventive checkpointing enhancement eliminates the CPU 51 state restoration dependency on instruction window size.

Timeout Checkpoint may be used in a structure and method implementing conventional checkpoints, or the inventive rename map checkpointing. Furthermore, timeout checkpoints may be used with conventional processor backup techniques as well as with the inventive backup and backstepping structure and method. Timeout Counter 355 receives INSTR₋₋ ISSUED signal from ISU 200 that indicates that at least one instruction was issued during that machine cycle and counts the number of instructions issue. When the number of instruction issue cycles that have passed without forming a checkpoint (either a checkpoint based on instruction decode or an earlier timeout checkpoint) exceeds a predetermined count, it sends TIMEOUT₋₋ CHKPNT signal to ISU that a timeout condition has occurred, and that a checkpoint should be formed. The ISU 200 then generates a DO₋₋ CHKPT signal to indicate that a checkpoint should be formed. As indicated earlier, this signal may also be generated when ISU 200 determines that an issued instruction is of the type that requires a checkpoint. Counter 356 is reset by DO₋₋ CHKPNT signal from ISU if and only if a checkpoint is actually formed. The maximum number of instructions allowed within a checkpoint boundary is determined by the maximum instruction issue rate (maximum number of instructions issued per machine cycle) and the timeout value of the counter.

Variations on the timeout checkpoint may be advantageous. For example, if one of the instructions due to be issued in the same cycle as the timeout checkpoint is due, the instruction decode based checkpoint may be preferentially made and serve to reset the timeout counter. Furthermore, if all checkpoints are allocated at the time a timeout checkpoint becomes due, the timeout checkpoint may be delayed according to predetermined rules (e.g. delay one cycle) rather than stalling the machine as might be required to maintain precise state for an instruction decode type checkpoint.

F. Maintaining and Restoring Precise State at Any Instruction Boundary

The method of the present invention permits maintenance of precise state at any instruction boundary and also minimizes the amount of information required to restore state at the instruction boundary. As used in here, an "instruction boundary" corresponds to the point in the sequential set of instructions just before (or just after) an instruction is issued. Each and every instruction creates an instruction boundary.

Conventional instruction checkpoint permit maintenance of precise state at Checkpoint boundaries (i.e. only at checkpointed instructions) in the processor but conventional checkpointing has not been used at every instruction, and even if so used would hinder rather than improve CPU 51 performance because for a machine issuing multiple instructions per machine cycle, an equal multiple of checkpoints would be required for each cycle. In the present invention various instruction Issue rules are implemented so that only one instruction ever need be checkpointed each cycle, and the backstep method and structure provides the finer instruction level restoration. Instruction checkpoints are used to preserve and later restore architectural (machine) state, such as state which may be incorrectly modified by a speculative instruction sequence.

Conventional checkpointing that maintains precise state at checkpoint boundaries is known; however, conventional checkpointing when used as the only method of capturing and later restoring machine state does not permit maintenance of precise state at the more closely spaced instruction boundaries during speculative out-of-order execution.

G. Method of Syncing Machine for Predetermined Instructions to Reduce Amount of Checkpointed Data

Checkpoints are a fixed size independent of the instruction type or operands for which they are created. For example, in a machine (CPU) having instructions that may alter 200 state values, every checkpoint created must store those 100 state values even if the instruction itself will at most modify eight values. In an embodiment of the invention, novel structure and method are implemented to reduce the amount of checkpointed data in all checkpoints by taking into account the amount of state modified by each particular instruction and the statistical frequency which the each particular instruction occurs in typical processing.

Using this design technique, an optimum checkpoint size may be determined and implemented in the machine. First, the state modifiable by each instruction is determined. Second, the statistical frequency at which each particular instruction occurs for some representative nominal processing task is determined. The state storage requirements for each instruction are examined. The design goal is to identify those instructions that are rarely issued and require relatively larger amounts of checkpoint storage than more frequently occurring instructions. Any linear or non-linear optimization technique may be used to determine which instructions to checkpoint, and non-mathematical rules based on some maximum checkpoint storage may also be used to achieve a reduction in checkpointed state. A simplified example is described below:

Simplified Example of Checkpointed State Reduction ##STR1##

If each of instructions A, B, C, and D are checkpointed then every checkpoint must store all of states 1-10. However, if Instruction C is rarely executed so that the CPU 51 slowdown necessitated by syncing the machine during execution of that instruction occurs only rarely, then not checkpointing instruction C reduces the checkpointed state from ten states to three states: state 1, state 4, and state 8.

Syncing the machine involves delaying issuance of any instruction that requires machine sync until pending instructions have committed and been retired and then executing instructions requiring sync sequentially and in-order. When the machine is run in sync mode, instruction checkpointing is not required to maintain precise state because exception conditions are identified before writeback to state is made.

H. Method of Checkpointing Register Rename Map to reduce amount of Checkpointed Data.

Furthermore, conventional checkpoints contain large amounts of information because the entire state of the machine at the time the checkpoint was generated is stored so that machine state can be restored to recover from a mispredicted branch, fault, execution error, or other anomaly in processing. No attempt is made in conventional checkpointing methods to modify only the state that changes.

For example, if conventional checkpointing methods were applied to each instruction in the CPU 51 that permitted sixty-four concurrently issued instructions, then up to sixty-four checkpoints would have to be maintained, one for each of the instructions, and as many as four checkpoints would have to be created per machine cycle in a four-issue machine. Although the particular type and amount of state stored in a conventional checkpoint will depend on the CPU 51 architecture and the instruction set, each conventional checkpoint contains state information for every state that may be modified by any instruction. That is, a conventional checkpoint contains state information for every modifiable state independent of whether the instruction can modify that state or not. In conventional checkpointing methods, all of the machine status required to restore machine state are rewritten for each checkpoint, not just the status that changes from checkpoint to checkpoint.

In the inventive method, registers are renamed and the Rename Maps are stored in a register rename map. Register renaming is described elsewhere herein. Register renaming is a method of mapping architectural registers to greater number of physical registers that serves to effectively increase the number of architectural registers available for processing. In the inventive method, the amount of storage required for a new checkpointing method is reduced by checkpointing the renamed registers rather than the data values themselves. As described, certain predetermined instructions that would require large amounts of checkpointed state to maintain Precise state cause the machine to sync so that all previously issued instructions have executed, committed, and had their resources retired (ISN=CSN=RRP). If the synced type instruction faults is mispredicted, then state will not be modified and either the fault can be handled or an alternative instruction path can be pursued before the instruction execution results are permitted to modify state.

All state modified by non-sync requiring instructions which may modify control registers are checkpointed sO that machine state may be quickly restored. All state modified by the instructions is checkpointed and stored locally within the CPU 51 as described. Furthermore, state for execution of instructions which do not modify control registers may be restored by backstepping the CPU 51 as described elsewhere in this specification. FIG. 26 is a diagrammatic flow-chart of an embodiment of the inventive method for checkpointing including an optional checkpointing enhancement applicable to other checkpointing methods for forming a time-out checkpoint.

V. RECOVERY FROM MISPREDICTS AND EXCEPTIONS

As was alluded to earlier, at times, program control mispredictions and exceptions may occur in the instruction pipeline of FIG. 5. These errors must then be detected and an handle so as to return the CPU 51 to the state it was in just prior to the instruction that caused the misprediction or exception. A. Misprediction Detection with Watchpoint for Simultaneous Plural Unresolved Branch/Jump-and-Link Instruction Evaluation

For the processors which can execute instructions speculatively, branch direction (taken or not taken), or branch address (target address or address next to the branch instruction) can be predicted before they are resolved. Later, if these predictions turn out to be wrong, the CPU 51 backs up to the previous state, and then begins executing instructions in the correct branch stream. In conventional processors, plural branches are often ready to evaluate in one cycle; however, these conventional processors evaluate only a single branch prediction per cycle. Not-selected branch evaluations which are ready for evaluation must therefore be delayed. Delaying branch evaluations detracts from CPU 51 performance and evaluating branches as early as possible can significantly improve performance.

The inventive Watchpoint structure and method provides several advantages over conventional techniques. First, it can monitor or watch a plurality of predicted branch or jump-and-link instructions simultaneously. Second, it can grab a plurality of condition-code data or calculated jump-and-link (JMPL) addresses for which predicted branch or jump-and-link instructions are walling by simultaneously monitoring or watching data forward buses from a plurality of execution units. Third, it can generate a plurality of misprediction signals of branch or jump-and-link instructions simultaneously. Fourth, it can store alternate branch address or predicted jump-and-link address in a single shared storage area. Fifth, it sends the correct branch address or jump-and-link address for instruction fetch when misprediction is detected by Watchpoint.

Referring to FIG. 27, Watchpoint (WPT) 304 is responsible for monitoring the execution and prediction status of each issued checkpointed control transfer instruction. Therefore, WPT 304 receives a DO₋₋ CHKPNT signal along with a DO₋₋ WTCHPT signal that includes condition code information for branch, annulling branch, and jump-link instructions including condition information for Br Xcc, condition Br Icc, condition Br Fcc, JMPL rt(I) (rd=0), and read/write to control registers (except CCR and FSR registers). Condition code information is later used by WPT 304 in determining whether an instruction sequence was properly predicted or needs to be undone. WPT 304 is discussed in greater detail elsewhere in this specification.

Watchpoint Unit 304 is responsible for monitoring or watching execution completion signals arriving over the data forward busses from DFB 62 and informing other CPU 51 units when predetermined events are detected, such as branch mispredictions for example. Watchpoint Registers 491 within Watch point Unit 304 are multipurpose. They check branch predictions, JMPL predictions, and supply a correct branch/JMPL address to BRB 59 for refetching instructions after a backup when the original prediction was incorrect. They are called "Watchpoint" registers because they sit on data forward distribution buses and monitor results from the several executk)n units (FXU, FPU, LSU, and FXAGU). There are sixteen watchpoint registers, one for each checkpoint.

An exemplary Watchpoint Unit 304 is described with respect to a CPU having an integer execution unit (FXU) and integer and address generation execution unit (FXAGU) and a floating-point execution unit (FPU). Those workers having ordinary skill in the art, in light of this description, will realize that more, fewer, or different execution units may be implemented. In particular, to match the execution units of the exemplary CPU 51, an additional FXU and FXAGU would be provided.

FIG. 27 shows a functional block diagram of the major functional blocks within Watchpoint Unit 304. Fetch Unit (FETCH) within BRB 59 fetches instructions and feeds them to ISSUE 200, and also predicts branches and JMPL's based on a decode of the instruction. Issue 200 sends DO₋₋ CHKPNT signals to Watchpoint 304 and to FSR/CCRFRN 606 and DO₋₋ WTCHPT signals to Watchpoint 304. FSR/CCRFRN is responsible for condition code renaming (CC-renaming). DO₋₋ CHKPNT includes a MAKE₋₋ CHKPNT signal that initiates checkpoint formation and a NEXT₋₋ CHKPNT signal that identifies the checkpoint number to be formed. The DO₋₋ WTCHPT signal informs Watchpoint 304 that a branch or JMPL instruction has been issued and identifies the branch type, the condition field in the issued instruction, the Condition Code (CC) tag, and the Alternate Next Program Counter address/predicted jump and link instruction address (ANPC/predicted JMPL address) of the issued instruction. FETCH also sends branch/JMPL addresses to Watchpoint 304 in the form of the WR-ANPC signal within the DO₋₋ WTCHPT signal. When a branch or JMPL or other control transfer instructions (branch/JMPL) is issued, ISU 200 sends a branch/JMPL instruction issued signal (DO₋₋ WTCHPT) signal for each predicted branch or JMPL issued which includes the signal JMPL. WP₋₋ ANPC is written into the Target-RAM and indicates the target FPC computed by PC Logic 106. The ANPC is determined during instruction decode of predicted branch and JMPL instructions. For a JMPL instruction, the WP₋₋ ANPC sent to Watchpoint within the DO₋₋ WTCHPT signal is the predicted target FPC. For a predicted branch instruction, the WP₋₋ ANPC sent to Watchpoint within the DO₋₋ WTCHPT signal is the alternative FPC, that is the FPC for the altemative branch direction. The RD₋₋ ANPC output from the ANPC Output Logic within Watchpoint is used during a Backup to compute FPC, APC, and NAPC when a misprediction occurs. The Condition Code (CC) poffion of Rename 600 (referred to as FSP-JCCRFRN 606) manages CC register renaming and sends CC-renaming signals to Watchpoint 304 after instruction issue. The CC-renaming signals include CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ RENAMED₋₋ C, CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ C, CC₋₋ DV₋₋ C, and CC₋₋ DATA₋₋ C as defined below.

Each of the execution units (FXU 601, FXAGU 602, and FPU 600) sends condition code tag (CC₋₋ TAGS₋₋ F), condition code data valid (CC₋₋ DV₋₋ F), and condition code data (CC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F) over the data forward busses to both Watchpoint 304 and to FSPJCCRFRN 606. Tag, data valid, and XCC and ICC data signals from FXU include FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ TAGS₋₋ F, FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DV₋₋ F, FXU₋₋ XCC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F, and FXUICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F. Signals from FXAGU include FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ TAGS₋₋ F, FXUAG₋₋ XICC₋₋ DV₋₋ F, FXAGU₋₋ XCC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F, and FXAGU₋₋ ICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F. Signals from FPU include FPU₋₋ FCC₋₋ TAGS₋₋ F, FPU₋₋ FCC₋₋ DV₋₋ F, and FPU₋₋ FCC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F. Examples of XCC, ICC, and FCC condition codes and formats are described in the SPARC-V9, for example.

In reference to FIG. 28, Watchpoint 304 includes CC-Grabbing logic 1000 which grabs condition codes directly off of the CC data forward busses from the execution units (FXU, FPU, and FXAGU) or from renamed CC signals arriving from FSR/CCRFRN 606, Watchpoint storage elements 1002 and associated read/write control logic are responsible for storing watchpoint information including predicted condition code data arriving from BRB 59 whenever branch or JMPL instructions are deceded, and Evaluation Logic (Eval-Logic) 1001 which is responsible for performing comparisons of the computed or actual condition codes arriving from the execution units (directly or via the rename unit) and comparing term with the predicted condition codes stored in the individual Watchpoint storage elements 1002. Target-RAM and its associated control and comparison logic 1003 participate in recovering from a branch or JMPL misprediction as described in greater detail below. CC-Grabbing logic 1000, Eval-Logic 1001, and WP-Elements 1002 comprise sixteen separate structures, one for each of the sixteen Watchpoints that may be allocated in the exemplary CPU 51. Only a single Target-RAM 1003 data storage structure is provided.

Several data elements are stored for each of the sixteen Watchpoints. Data stored for each watchpoint includes a watchpoint valid bit (WP₋₋ VALID[i]=1) that is set upon watchpoint activation, a instruction type data to distinguish branch instructions from JMPL instructions (WP₋₋ JMPL[i]=1) indicates that a JMPL requires the watchpoint, WP₋₋ JMPL[i]=0 indicates the watchpoint is formed for a predicted branch), condition field in the instruction (WP₋₋ COND[i]), and storage for WP₋₋ XCC, WP₋₋ ICC, and WP₋₋ FCC. In one exemplary embodiment, these data elements are stored in latches. CC-tags are stored in CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ ARRAY, and "ANPC" (Alternate Next Program Counter address)/predicted JMPL (lump and link instruction) addresses are stored in the Target-RAM. Valid is written by watchpoint logic, branch type, COND, CC-tag, and ANPC/JMPL address are derived from DO₋₋ WTCHPT signals received from ISU 200. In response to DO₋₋ WTCHPT, a watchpoint storage element 491 is activated for each branch/JMPL instruction and Field Selection and Write Logic decodes DO₋₋ WTCHPT signals and writes the branch type, COND field, CC tag, and the ANPC/predicted JMPL address into Watchpoint.

Watchpoint entries can be activated by setting the Valid-bit to "1 ", unless all checkpoint elements have already been allocated at that cycle, in which case issue of the instruction requiring a watchpoint (and checkpoint) is delayed. Multiple watchpoint elements can be active (valid) at the same time, and all watchpoint entries which are valid (VALID field set) can be evaluated and generate misprediction signals simultaneously in each cycle. Watchpoint 304 can store either one of ANPC for branch instructions, or predicted target address for JMPL instructions in the same storage location in order to reduce chip area allocated to data storage. How the allocated multipurpose watchpoint register is actually used depends on the content of the DO₋₋ WTCHPT signals from ISU 200, that is whether the watchpoint entries are formed for a predicted branch or for a predicted JMPL instruction. Watchpoint registers self-deallocate as branch and jump predictions evaluate.

A Watchpoint element is allocated by Watchpoint Unit 304 whenever an instruction may result in a mispredict such as may occur for a conditional branch instruction. Every Watchpoint element has a corresponding checkpoint element but the converse is not always true. A Checkpoint may not have a corresponding active watchpoint entry because a watchpoint element is allocated whenever an instruction may result in a mispredict, for example, in the case of a conditional branch. Since checkpoints may be allocated for other that instructions that may result in a mispredict (such as "SAVE" instruction, or when a periodic "timeout" checkpoint is formed for other than a branch instruction) not all checkpoints have watchpoints. Watchpoints are stored in one of a plurality of Watchpoint Elements 432 within Watchpoint Unit 304. A Checkpoint Register is provided to store Checkpoint information; however, the actual checkpointed machine state is stored locally throughout the CPU 51 as described. Table 4 shows an example of the type of information stored by serial number in Checkpoints and the corresponding Watchpoints, if any, for a set of exemplary instructions.

Condition Code Grabbing Logic Unit 492 is responsible for detecting and capturing Condition Codes (CC) as they appear on the data forward busses from execution units within DFB 62 and routing them to Evaluation Logic Unit493 where the captured condition codes are compared with the condition code predicted at the time the instruction was issued and now stored in Watchpoint element 491. If the captured condition code matches the predicted condition cede, then the instruction was correctly predicted and need not be undone. However, if the condition code captured by the grabbing unit does not match the predicted condition codes, then the instruction has been mispredicted and must be undone.

                                      TABLE 4                                      __________________________________________________________________________     Simplified Exemplary Watchpoint and Checkpoint Storage                         No.                                                                               CHECKPOINTS   WATCHPOINTS                                                   __________________________________________________________________________     0  SN=33, BRZ, Machine State                                                                    BRZ, CC Register waiting for, CC Register Tags                1  SN=41, ADD, Machine State                                                   no watchpoint needed                                                           2  SN=44, JMPL, Machine State                                                                   JMPL, Register Tags (result of jmpl addr. calc.)              3  SN=47, SAVE, Machine State                                                  no watchpoint needed                                                           free checkpoint                                                                free watchpoint                                                                .  .             .                                                             .  .             .                                                             .  .             .                                                             14 SN=28, FBGE, Machine State                                                                   FBGE, FCC we're waiting for, Register Tags                    15                                                                             free checkpoint                                                                free watchpoint                                                                __________________________________________________________________________

Capturing and comparing condition codes from the execution units is complicated by several factors, including: out-of-order instruction sequence execution, instruction execution queuing within each execution unit, the variable number of machine cycles needed for execution of different instruction types, and variability related to the need to wait for execution resources or data for instructions even for the same instruction types. These factors, and others; result in a general uncertainty as to when instruction results and status including error and condition code information) will actually appear on the data forward busses. Therefore, the invention includes structure and method for capturing condition code data that may appear on the busses during the same machine cycle as the instruction was issued, or during any later cycle. It also provides structure and method for capturing condition codes for renamed registers. Register renaming, including renaming condition code registers, is provided in the exemplary CPU 51 in order to eliminate registers dependencies. Therefore, Watchpoint Unit 304 receives CC data and tags directly from the data forward busses, and later from FSP/CCRFRN 606, after CC registers in CCRFRN have been updated.

In FIG. 27, two Fixed-Point Execution units (FXU and FXAGU) and one Floating Point Execution Unit (FPU) within DFB 62 are shown, but more or fewer execution units can be implemented and they may be of any type. Each execution unit is connected by a CC-data-forward bus 430 to CCRFRN 606 and Watchpoint 304. The CC-data-forward bus 430 carries the result of CC-data which is just calculated by the unit execution unit (FXU, FXAGU, and FPU). The CC-data is used to update CCRFRN. Watchpoint 304 also monitors or watches the CC-data-forward-buses and "grabs" CC-data directly from the busses rather than waiting to get it from CCRFRN in a later cycle. Grabbing the CC-data directly from the buses in this manner makes branch evaluations faster.

When branch mispredictions are detected by Watchpoint 304, it sends misprediction signals WP₋₋ MISPRED₋₋ VEC to PLSM 307 within PSU 300. PSU 300 tracks and controls the main states of the CPU 51 as described. When PSU gets misprediction signals WP₋₋ MISPRED₋₋ VEC from Watchpoint, PLSM 307 within PSU 300 selects the earliest one among the mispredictions and execution exceptions and initiates backtrack procedures as described elsewhere in this specification.

FIG. 25 shows a more detailed functional block diagram of Watch point 304 and interfaces to ISB, FSR/CCRFRN, Execution Units (FXU, FXAGU, and FPU) within the DFB, BRB, and to PLSM within PSU 300. Each of these major functional blocks are described in greater detail below.

1. Activation of Watchpoint Elements

Watchpoint Element and Control Logic Unit (WP-Element) 1002 includes WP Activation/Deactivation Control Logic 2012 and a sef of sixteen Watchpoint Elements 2013 where each of the sixteen elements stores information pertaining to XCC, ICC, FCC, COND, JMPL/branch, and a validity indicator. When a branch/JMPL is issued and predicted, DO₋₋ WTCHPT signal is asserted by ISU 200 that includes condition code information for predicted branch, annulling branch, and jump-link instructions. "Predict a branch" means "predict a direction of branch (taken or not-taken)". "Predict a JMPL" means "predict a JMPL target address" because JMPL always changes program flow (always taken). When issuing branch/JMPL instructions, the exemplary CPU 51 makes a checkpoint identified by a checkpoint number. Once made, a checkpoint remains active until the CPU 51 completes all instruction executions for instructions lying between the checkpoint location and the next checkpoint location. The processor can have multiple active checkpoints at a time. Checkpoint formation is not limited to issued branch/JMPL instructions, but may be formed in other cases, such as when taking a trap, for example.

Each Watchpoint element 2012 corresponds to a checkpoint entry. The exemplary CPU 51 has sixteen check point entries and therefore Watchpoint 304 has sixteen Watchpoint elements. Watchpoint Activation/Deactivation logic (WADL) 2012 is responsible for activating a watchpoint element in response to DO₋₋ CHKPNT and DO₋₋ WTCHPNT signals from ISU 200. DO₋₋ CHKPNT includes a MAKE₋₋ CHKPNT signal that initiates checkpoint formation and a NEXT₋₋ CHKPNT signal that identifies the checkpoint number to be formed. WADL 2012 is also responsible for deactivating a watchpoint element when the predicted branch/JMPL instruction is resolved. When ISU 200 issues a branch instruction ISU 200 asserts a MAKE₋₋ CHKPNT signal that indicates that a checkpoint should be formed, and a checkpoint number is assigned by PSU 300 and designated by NEXT₋₋ CHKPNT. As shown in FIG. 50, in order to activate one Watchpoint element, NEXT₋₋ CHKPNT is decoded by Decoder 434 and ANDed in an AND gate 435 with a DO₋₋ PREDICT signals derived from DO₋₋ WTCHPT from ISU 200. The output is called DO₋₋ PREDICT₋₋ VEC[i]. The signal DO₋₋ PREDICT₋₋ VEC[i] sets WP₋₋ VALID[i], where [i] indicates one of the sixteen watchpoint numbers. FIG. 50 also shows additional structural detail for a particular embodiment of the Watchpoint Unit associated with WP₋₋ ACTIVE₋₋ VEC and WP₋₋ MISPRED₋₋ VEC Logic, including a portion of the Watchpoint Output Logic 2102.

ISU 200 sends several signals to Watchpoint when a branch/JMPL instruction is issued. These signals identify the instruction as a branch that depends on XCC, as a branch that depends on ICC, as a branch that depends on FCC, as a jump-link instruction (JMPL), and the condition code filed of the branch (COND). These signals are received by Watchpoint 304 and stored in the watchpoint element designated by NEXT₋₋ CHKPNT as a component signal of DO₋₋ CHKPNT. When Watch point element "i" is assigned by the Watchpoint Activation Control Logic 0NACL) 2012, these signals are kept in WP₋₋ XCC[i], WP.sub.˜ ICC[i], WP₋₋ FCC[i], WP₋₋ JMPL[i], and WP₋₋ COND[i] registers respectively. Each Watchpoint element retains these register values until the Watchpoint element is deactivated and then re-activated by another branch/JMPL instruction.

The exemplary CPU 51 can make more than one checkpoint each cycle and can issue more than one branch/JMPL instruction per cycle. Therefore, more than one Watchpoint element can be activated. For example, if a CPU 51 can make two checkpoints and issue two branches in the same cycle, two sets of DO₋₋ WTCHPT, XCC, ICC, FCC, JMPL, COND, DO₋₋ CHKPNT signals or their equivalent information content are needed.

Condition Code Formats and field definitions and JMPL (jump-and-link) instruction format and definitions are provided in SPARC V9 Architecture manual, already of record in this specification. Floating Point Condition codes having a two-bit format including bit-0 and bit-1. Integer Condition Codes are provided for XCC in bits 7-4 (N, Z, V, C respectively) and ICC as bits 3-0 (N, Z, V, C respectively). When a branch is issued and predicted "taken", COND value is same as the condition field data of the branch instruction. When a branch is issued and predicted "not-taken", a bit-3 of the COND field data is inverted, the rest of bits are unchanged, then, these become COND value.

FIG. 28 shows a more detailed representation of the internal structure of Watchpoint 304 showing CC-grabbing Logic 1000, Eval-logic 1001, WP-Elements Storage and Control Unit 1002, and target ram 1003. FIG. 29 shows a different schematic portion of Watchpoint 304, including current match logic 1005, array late matching logic 1004, and CC-select logic 1006 which includes Evaluation Ready (EVAL₋₋ READY) and Evaluate Condition Code (EVAL₋₋ CC) logic.

FIG. 30 shows a timing chart of branch prediction and evaluation. Watchpoint has a plurality of Watchpoint elements which each can hold a predicted branch/JMPL information and evaluate the correctness of the prediction. At cycle 1, a branch is issued. At cycle 2, one of the plurality of Watchpoint elements (assume element "i") is activated. Then WP₋₋ ACTIVE[i] is asserted. At cycle 5, FXU unit is returning the CC-data which the branch depends on and the Watchpoint element is waiting for. At cycle 5, the Watchpoint element i grabs the CC-data. At cycle 6, WP₋₋ ACTIVE₋₋ VEC[i] is de-asserted because the watchpoint element has grabbed the CC-data, and EVAL₋₋ READY[i] is asserted, EVAL₋₋ READY[i] enables CC-evaluation. If the prediction is correct, EVAL₋₋ TRUE[i] is asserted. If not, EVAL₋₋ TRUE[i] is not asserted. In this example, the timing diagram assumes that the prediction is not correct. Then WP₋₋ MISPRED₋₋ VEC is asserted and sent to PLSM within PSU 300. PLSM takes priority among WP₋₋ MISPRED₋₋ VEC[i] signals from all Watchpoint elements (sixteen elements in the exemplary embodiment) and execution trap signals from execution units, and takes determines the earliest event. At cycle 7, PSU 300 asserts DO₋₋ BACKUP signals which cause the CPU 51 to back up to a previous state. The DO₋₋ BACKUP signal includes a MAKE₋₋ BACKUP control signal that informs the CPU to perform the backup and a BACKUP₋₋ CHKPNT signal that identifies the Checkpoint number to which the backup will be made. FIG. 29 shows additional structural detail for a particular embodiment of the Watchpoint Unit associated with one of the plurality of watchpoint elements.

2. Watchpoint Grabbing of CC Pata directly from pata Forward Busses

CC-Grabbing Logic 1000 includes CCTag Current Match Logic 2001 which receives condition code data valid and condition code tags from the data forward busses and attempts to match them with condition code tags received from ISB during the current machine cycle. Exemplary logic circuitry is shown for an embodiment of CC Tag Current Match Logic in FIG. 31.

FSR/CCRFRN 606 sends the following signals to Watchpoint: CC₋₋ RENAMED, CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ C, CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ RENAMED₋₋ C, CC₋₋ DV₋₋ C, and CC₋₋ DATA. CC₋₋ RENAMED is asserted when CC is modified by instructions issued in the current machine cycle. CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ C identifies the renamed-CC-physical tag except that CC modifications occurring in the current machine cycle are excluded. CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ RENAMED₋₋ C also means renamed-CC-physical-tag but the CC modifications occurring in the current cycle are included. CC₋₋ DV₋₋ C is asserted when CC₋₋ DATA has CC data which is modified by the previous cycle but excludes the CC modifications done in the current cycle. Therefore if CC₋₋ DV₋₋ C=1, all CC modifications done by the previous cycle are reflected in CC₋₋ DATA. Furthermore, if CC₋₋ DV₋₋ C=0, then the CC₋₋ DATA value is not up to date, and FSR/CCRFRN is waiting for the completions of instructions which were issued by the previous cycle before it grabs up-to-date CC data. The signals sent to watchpoint by FSPJCCRFRN 606 are described in Table 6.

                                      TABLE 6                                      __________________________________________________________________________     FSR/CCRFRN 606 sends the following signals to Watchpoint:                      Signal      Description                                                        __________________________________________________________________________     CC.sub.-- RENAMED                                                                          Asserted when CC is modified by instructions issued in the                     current                                                                        machine cycle. Used by Condition Code Select logic.                CC.sub.-- TAG.sub.-- C                                                                     Identifies the renamed-CC-physical tag, but excludes CC                        modifications                                                                  occurring in the current machine cycle. Used for current                       match.                                                             CC.sub.-- TAG.sub.-- RENAMED.sub.-- C                                                      Identifies renamed-CC-physical-tag but icludes the CC                          modifications                                                                  occurring in the current cycle. Written into array and used                    for array                                                                      match.                                                             CC.sub.-- DV.sub.-- C                                                                      Asserted when CC.sub.-- DATA has CC data which is modified by                  the                                                                            previous cycle, but excludes the CC modifications done in the                  current                                                                        cycle. Used by Condition Code Select logic.                        CC.sub.-- DATA                                                                             If CC.sub.-- DV.sub.-- C=1, all CC modifications done by the                   previous cycle are                                                             reflected in CC.sub.-- DATA[7:0].                                              If CC.sub.-- DV.sub.-- C=0, then the CC.sub.-- DATA value is                   not up to date, and                                                            FSR/CCRFRN is waiting for the completions of instructions                      which were                                                                     issued by the previous cycle before it grabs up-to-date CC                     data. Used                                                                     by Condition Code Select logic.                                    __________________________________________________________________________

In FIG. 31, comparison circuits 2006, 2008, and 2010 each receive CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ C signals which identifies the renamed-CC-physical tag, but excludes CC modifications occurring in the current machine cycle. Each of the comparison circuits also receives condition cede tags directly from the data forward busses; FPU₋₋ FCC₋₋ TAG₋₋ F from the FPU, FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ TAG₋₋ F from the FXU, and FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ TAG₋₋ F from the FXAGU, where both the FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ TAG₋₋ F and the FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ TAG₋₋ F include both XCC and ICC parts of the Integer condition code. The outputs of the comparisons are sent to AND gates 2007, 2009, and 2011 and ANDed with a data valid signal (FPU₋₋ FCC₋₋ DV₋₋ F, FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DV₋₋ F, or FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DV₋₋ F) which serves as a control signal. If the data valid signal is asserted then a match determined by the comparison circuits is valid and the CC current match signal (FPU₋₋ CURR₋₋ MATCH, FXU₋₋ CURR₋₋ MATCH, or FXAGU₋₋ CURR₋₋ MATCH) are asserted.

As shown in FIG: 31, CC renamed Tag Array Matching Logic 2002 includes a set of sixteen sets of comparison circuits 2015 and logic circuits to perform the AND logic function 2016 for each of the execution units (FPU, FXU, FXAGU). Whereas the Current Match Logic 2001 compares the signals from the data forward busses with CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ C, the Array Match Logic Unit 2002 simultaneously compares each of the signals from the data forward busses with CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ RENAMED₋₋ C which identifies renamed-CC-physical-tag but includes the CC modifications occurring in the current cycle. CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ RENAMED₋₋ C is written into one of sixteen CC Tag Array 2003 storage elements under control of a write enable signal generated by ANDing CC₋₋ RENAMED which is asserted when CC is modified by instructions issued in the current machine cycle with DO₋₋ PREDICT₋₋ VEC. Each cycle every stored value of CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ RENAMED₋₋ C is compared with FPU₋₋ FCC₋₋ TAG₋₋ F from the FPU, FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ TAG₋₋ F from the FXU, and FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ TAG₋₋ F from the FXAGU to identify any matches, that is sixteen comparisons are made for each of the FPU, FXU, and FXAGU each cycle. The outputs of comparison circuits 2016 are ANDed with data valid signals (FPU₋₋ FCC₋₋ DV₋₋ F, FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DV₋₋ F, or FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DV₋₋ F) which serves as control signals. If the data valid signal is asserted then a match determined by the comparison circuits is valid and the CC array match signal (FPU₋₋ ARRAY₋₋ MATCH[i], FXU₋₋ ARRAY₋₋ MATCH[i], and FXAGU₋₋ ARRAY₋₋ MATCH[i]) are asserted. Therefore, the CC-Grabbing Logic is able to simultaneously monitor plural unresolved branch evaluations.

FIG. 31 shows CC grabbing logic. CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ ARRAY comprises sixteen registers, each register corresponds to one of the sixteen checkpoints and has the same numbers of latches as CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ C bit number (here we assume 4 bit latches). When issuing and predicting a branch, CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ RENAMED₋₋ C is written into the location of CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ ARRAY designated by DO₋₋ PREDICT₋₋ VEC[i] derived from DO₋₋ WTCHPT. CC₋₋ RENAMED serves as a write enable signal in Write Enable and Address Selector Logic 2004, such as a AND logic gate.

The processor is assumed for purposes of this description to have two fixed-point execution units: FXU and FXAGU, and one floating-point execution unit FPU. In the exemplary embodiment, it is assumed that only FXU processes JMPL instructions. Each unit has CC-data-forward bus. FXU CC-data-forward bus comprises FXU₋₋ CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ VALID, FXU CC TAG, and FXU CC DATA. When FXU is finishing its execution which modifies CC, FXU₋₋ CC TAG₋₋ VALID is asserted, FXU₋₋ CC₋₋ TAG has its renamed CC physical tag, and FXU₋₋ CC₋₋ DATA has the result data of CC. The same thing applies to FXAGU and FPU. Condition Code (CC) data in FSR/CCRFRN unit is updated using these CC data forward buses in the next cycle. Watch point also grabs CC data from the data forward buses if Watchpoint elements are waiting for the CC data. CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ C is compared with FXU CC TAG, its match signal is ANDed with FXU₋₋ CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ VALID, and the output signal is called FXU CC CURR₋₋ MATCH. And also the contents of registers in CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ ARRAY are compared with FXU₋₋ CC₋₋ TAG, their match signals are ANDed with FXU₋₋ CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ VALID, and the output signals are called FXU₋₋ CC₋₋ ARRAY₋₋ MATCH[i]. For FXAGU and FPU, there are the same match functions as FXU. Operation of the Grabbing Logic is now described with reference to three instruction issue sequence examples. The exemplary CPU 51 can issue up to four Instructions per cycle.

CC Grabbing Logic 1000 also includes CC Select Logic 2005 (sixteen layers, one for each watchpoint) which are responsible for generating signals based on the condition code on which the branch in that watchpoint element depends and that when asserted selects the CC data signal (for example, CC₋₋ DATA[7:4]) and also latches that data signal for evaluation in the next cycle. Exemplary logic circuitry for an embodiment of Condition Code Select Logic 2005 is provided in FIG. 32. The operation of this CC Select Logic 2005 is described with respect to three examples below.

Evaluation Logic 1001 includes Evaluation Ready Logic (EVAL₋₋ READY) 2100, Evaluation True Logic (EVAL₋₋ TRUE) 2101, and Watchpoint Output Logic (WP Output Logic) 2102 as shown in FIG. 25. FIG. 33 shows additional structural detail associated with EVAL₋₋ READY Logic 2100 which receives a set of select signals (e.g. SEL₋₋ BR₋₋ XCC[i]) from CC Select Logic 2005 and an enable signal (EVAL₋₋ ENABLE) from the output of AND logic gate 2106. EVAL₋₋ ENABLE is asserted based on WP₋₋ ACTIVE₋₋ VEC[i], WP₋₋ JMPL, FXAGU₋₋ JMPL, and FXAGU₋₋ CHKPT. EVAL₋₋ READY Logic 2100 outputs an EVAL₋₋ READY[i] signal for the i-th watchpoint indicating that evaluation is ready.

FIG. 34 shows additional structural detail associated with the EVAL₋₋ TRUE Logic 2101 which includes CC₋₋ EVAL logic 2105. EVAL₋₋ TRUE logic is responsible for determining if the branch instruction or if the JMPL instruction was properly predicted. CC₋₋ EVAL 2105 receives EVAL₋₋ CC[i] from CC Select Logic 2005 and WP₋₋ CONDB, WP₋₋ XCC[i], WP₋₋ ICC[i], and WP₋₋ FCC[i] and received from ISB and stored in the Watchpoint Element2013 and evaluates the two signals based on a comparison using rules described in the SPARC-V9 manual. If they match, a branch true signal (BR-TRUE[i]) is generated for that i-th watchpoint. EVAL₋₋ TRUE Logic 2101 also compares the JMPL₋₋ MATCH output by JMPL Match Logic 2201 (See FIG. 35) with WP₋₋ JMPL[i] received from ISB and stored in the Watchpoint Element 2013. If JMPL₋₋ MATCH matches WP₋₋ JMPL[i] then the JMPL was properly predicted and a JMPL₋₋ TRUE[i] is asserted. The BR₋₋ TRUE[i] and JMPL₋₋ TRUE[i] are ORed to form the EVAL₋₋ TRUE[i] signal. A watchpoint is formed for a single instruction only and therefore only one of BR₋₋ TRUE[i] or JMPL₋₋ TRUE[i] will be asserted.

WP Output Logic 2102 is shown in FIG. 50. The EVAL₋₋ READY[i], EVAL₋₋ TRUE[i], WP₋₋ VALID[i] and KILL--VEC[i] from PSU 300 are input to WP Output Logic which outputs WP--ACTIVE--VEC[i] and WP₋₋ MISPRED₋₋ VEC[i] signals.

FIG. 35 shows additional structural detail associated with TARGET-RAM and JMPL Evaluation Logic. The JMPL Evaluation logic evaluated JMPL instructions of the return type where rd=0. ANPC Output Logic 2103 selects the RD--ANPC to send to the BRB Fetch Unit based on whether mispredict (MISPRED) is asserted by PSU PLSM based on the prioritization schemes described hereinwith and the comparison of the stored WP--ANPC, the value of FXU--DATA which is the correct computed value.

3. Examples of Watchpoint Operation a. Watchpoint Unit Operation--Example 1: Table 7, is a list of instructions for Example 1, executed in cycles X, X+1, and X+2. In cycle X, four instructions am issued and one of them (addcc) modifies CC. Then renamed-CC-physical tag #7 is assigned. In cycle X+1, again four instructions are issued, and none of them modify CC, and addcc is executed and returns the CC data in cycle X+1. In cycle X+2, the CC-data modified by addcc is in FSR/CCRFRN. In cycle X+2, four instructions are issued, none of them modify CC before branch, and then a branch instruction (br, xcc) is issued. In this case, in cycle X+2, CC₋₋ RENAMED=0 because there are no instructions issued which modify CC in the current cycle. Furthermore, CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ C=CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ RENAMED₋₋ C=7 because the latest CC tag is #7 and it is assigned in cycle X. And finally, CC₋₋ DV₋₋ C=I because the latest CC data is in FSP-JCCRFRN.

When issuing a branch, CC₋₋ DATA on which the branch depends on in FSR/CCRFRN is valid. Therefore CC₋₋ DV₋₋ C is asserted at the same cycle of issuing the branch. Suppose the branch depends on XCC. Then SEL₋₋ BR₋₋ XCC[i] is asserted (See FIG. 32) and the signal selects CC₋₋ DATA[7:4] and the data is latched in EVAL₋₋ CC[i] in the next cycle. (Signals CC₋₋ DATA[7:4] is either XCC₋₋ DATA₋₋ C and ICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ C, or FCC₋₋ DATA₋₋ C.) And EVAL₋₋ READY[i] is asserted in the next cycle (See FIG. 33). The CC evaluation becomes ready.

b. Watchpoint Unit Operation--Example 2: Table 8, is a list of instructions for Example 2, executed in cycles X, and X+1. In cycle X, four instructions are issued and one of them (addcc) modifies CC. Then renamed-CC,-physical tag #7 is assigned. In cycle X+1, again four instructions are issued, and none of them modify CC before branch and one of them is a branch instruction. In this case, in cycle X+1, CC...RENAMED=0 because there are no instructions issued which modify CC in the current cycle. And CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ C=CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ RENAMED₋₋ C=7 because the latest CC tag is #7 and it is assigned in the previous cycle. But CC₋₋ DV₋₋ C=0 because the latest CC data which is modified by addcc is not written into CC-Register in the FSR/CCRFRN.

When issuing a branch (at cycle X+1), CC₋₋ DATA on which the branch depends on in FSR/CCRFRN is not valid (CC₋₋ DV₋₋ C=0) because the instruction "addcc" which is issued at cycle X modifies CC and the result data is not written into CC-Register in FSR/CCRFRN. We suppose "addcc" is being executed at cycle X+1 by FXU executing unit and FXU is returning CC data on its data-forward-bus at cycle X+1. Then FXU₋₋ CC CURR₋₋ MATCH (See FIG. 31) is asserted at cycle X+1. SEL₋₋ FXU₋₋ XCC[i] (See FIG. 32 ) is asserted, and the signal selects FXU CC DATA and the data is latched in EVAL₋₋ CC[i] at cycle X+2. And EVAL₋₋ READY[i] is asserted at the cycle X+2 (See FIG. 33). Then CC evaluation becomes ready.

Note that not CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ RENAMED₋₋ C, but CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ C is used for FXU₋₋ CC₋₋ CURR₋₋ MATCH comparison. If any instructions which modify CC are issued at the same cycle when a branch is issued, CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ C is not the latest CC-physical tag. But CC₋₋ RENAMED is asserted and the signal inhibits FXU₋₋ CC₋₋ CURR₋₋ MATCH (See FIG. 32). That means FXU₋₋ CC₋₋ CURR₋₋ MATCH can be used when there are no instructions which modify CC at the same cycle when a branch is issued. Using CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ C[3:0] for FXU₋₋ CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ CURR₋₋ MATCH helps reduce the path delay because CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ C is a faster signal than CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ RENAMED₋₋ C.

c. Watchpoint Unit Operation--Example 3; Table 9, is a list of instructions for Example 3, executed in cycles X and X+1. In cycle X, four instructions are issued and one of the (addcc) modifies CC. Then renamed-CC-physical tag #7 is assigned. In cycle X+1, again four instructions are issued, and one of them (subcc) modifies CC before branch, and one of them is a branch instruction. The renamed-CC-physical tag #8 is assigned to the instruction, subcc. In this case, in cycle X+1, CC₋₋ RENAMED=1 because there is an instruction issued which modifies CC in the current cycle. CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ C=7 because the latest CC tag by the previous cycle is #7, and CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ RENAMED₋₋ C=8 because an instruction which modifies CC is issued in the current cycle, and the renamed-CC-physical tag #8 is assigned. And also, CC₋₋ DV₋₋ C=0 because the latest CC data which is modified by subcc is not written into CC-Register in FSR/CCRFRN.

When issuing a branch (at cycle X+1), CC₋₋ DATA on which the branch depends on in FSR/CCRFRN is not valid (CC₋₋ DV₋₋ C=0) because the instruction "addcc" which is issued at cycle X modifies CC and the result data is not written into CC-Register in FSR/CCRFRN. Moreover the instruction "subcc" is issued at cycle X+1, then CC₋₋ RENAMED is asserted. We suppose "subcc" is being executed at cycle X+2 by FXU executing unit and FXU is returning CC data on its data-forward-bus at cycle X+2. Then FXU₋₋ CC₋₋ ARRAY₋₋ MATCH[i] (See FIG. 31) is asserted at cycle X+2. SEL₋₋ FXU₋₋ XCC[i] (See FIG. 32) is asserted, and the signal selects FXU₋₋ CC₋₋ DATA[7:4] and the data is latched in EVAL₋₋ CC[i] at cycle X+3. And EVAL₋₋ READY[i] is asserted at the cycle X+3 (See FIG. 33). The CC evaluation becomes ready. There are 16 Watchpoint elements in this example, and each element can grab CC parallel for each branch evaluation at any cycle.

                  TABLE 7                                                          ______________________________________                                         Instructions and Signals from FSR/CCRFRN for Example 1.                              INSTRUC-                                                                 CYCLE TION              FSR/CCRFRN SIGNALS                                     ______________________________________                                         X     move                                                                           mul                                                                            addcc      <--#7                                                               div                                                                      X+1   move                                                                           move                                                                           move       (#7 executed)                                                       move                                                                     X+2   mul                   CC.sub.-- RENAMED=0                                      move                  CC.sub.-- TAG.sub.-- C=7                                 move                  CC.sub.-- TAG.sub.-- RENAMED.sub.-- C=7                  br, xcc               CC.sub.-- DV.sub.-- C=1                            ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE 8                                                          ______________________________________                                         Instructions and Signals from FSR/CCRFRN for Example 2.                              INSTRUC-                                                                 CYCLE TION              FSR/CCRFRN SIGNALS                                     ______________________________________                                         X     move                                                                           mul                                                                            addcc      <--#7                                                               div                                                                      X+1   mul        (#7 excecuted)                                                                            CC.sub.-- RENAMED=0                                      move                  CC.sub.-- TAG.sub.-- C=7                                 move                  CC.sub.-- TAG.sub.-- RENAMED.sub.-- C=7                  br, xcc               CC.sub.-- DV.sub.-- C=0                            ______________________________________                                    

                  TABLE 9                                                          ______________________________________                                         Instructions and Signals from FSR/CCRFRN for Example 3.                        CYCLE INSTRUCTION      FSR/CCRFRN SIGNALS                                      ______________________________________                                         X     move                                                                           mul                                                                            addcc        <--#7                                                             div                                                                      X+1   mul                  CC.sub.-- RENAMED=1                                       move                 CC.sub.-- TAG.sub.-- C=7                                  subcc        <--#8   CC.sub.-- TAG.sub.-- RENAMED.sub.-- C=8                   br, xcc              CC.sub.-- DV.sub.-- C=0                             ______________________________________                                    

4. Evaluation of Branch Instructions

One cycle after a branch is issued, WP₋₋ VALID[i] is asserted. If WP₋₋ VALID[i]=1 and EVAL₋₋ READY[i] =0 and KILL₋₋ VEC[i]=0, WP₋₋ ACTIVE₋₋ VEC[i] is asserted (See FIG. 29). "WP₋₋ ACTIVE[i]=1" means a branch which uses checkpoint i is already issued and is not resolved yet. If the value becomes 0, that means the branch is resolved (completed). WP₋₋ ACTIVE₋₋ VEC is sent to ICRU 301 and used for deciding which branch/JMPL instructions are completed.

When a branch evaluation becomes ready, EVAL₋₋ READY[i] is asserted and EVAL₋₋ CC[i] is the grabbed CC value. Then EVAL₋₋ CC[i] and WP₋₋ COND[i] are fed into CC₋₋ EVAL logic within EVAL₋₋ TRUE LOGIC 2101 (See FIG. 34), and the branch is evaluated. If the prediction made when issuing the branch is correct, BR₋₋ TRUEB is asserted. If not, it's not asserted. When evaluating a branch, WP₋₋ XCC[i], WP₋₋ ICC[i], WP₋₋ FCC[i] signals are also used to know branch type. BR₋₋ TRUE[i] is OR-ed with JMPL₋₋ TRUE[i] (to be explained later) and EVAL₋₋ TRUE[i] is generated. When WP₋₋ VALID[i]=1 and EVAL_(--READY)[i]= 1 and EVAL₋₋ TRUE[i]=0 and KILL₋₋ VEC[i]=0, WP₋₋ MISPRED₋₋ VEC[i] is asserted (See FIG. 29). "WP₋₋ MISPRED₋₋ VEC[i]=1" means the branch prediction made before is wrong. PSU receives this signal and execution error signals and chooses the earliest misprediction or execution error condition and then assert BACKUP signal to back up to the previous state.

PSU asserts KILL₋₋ VEC[i] signal when a backup occurs and the checkpoints taken after the backup point need to be killed. When KILL₋₋ VEC[i] is asserted, the corresponding Watchpoint element is also killed. "Killed" means WP₋₋ ACTIVE₋₋ VEC[i] and WP₋₋ MISPRED₋₋ VEC[i] are suppressed. WP₋₋ ACTIVE₋₋ VEC and WP₋₋ MISPRED₋₋ VEC can be multi-hot so that the WP₋₋ MISPRED₋₋ VEC[0-16] can be encoded in the same vector. That means that up to 16 Watchpoint elements (in this example) can be active at a time, and can detect mispredictions at a time.

When issuing and predicting a branch, FETCH sends branch-target address or next address of branch via WR₋₋ ANPC to Watchpoint. If the prediction is "taken", WR₋₋ ANPC Is next address of the branch (not-taken address). If the prediction is "not-taken", WR₋₋ ANPC is branch-target address (taken address). If it turns out that the prediction was wrong, Watchpoint sends back the address via RD₋₋ ANPC to FETCH to re-fetch instructions from the correct branch path. WR₋₋ ANPC value is stored into TARGET-RAM (See FIG. 35). TARGET-RAM has 16 entries and each entry corresponds to each checkpoint and can store one WR₋₋ ANPC address. The write enable signal and write address of this RAM are MAKE₋₋ CHKPNT and NEXT₋₋ CHKPNT. MAKE₋₋ CHKPNT is asserted when making a checkpoint. When BACKUP signal Is asserted, BACKUP₋₋ CHKPNT is used for read address of TARGET₋₋ RAM. BACKUP₋₋ CHKPNT designates the checkpoint which the CPU 51 backs up to. And the read data of TARGET-RAM is sent to FETCH via RD₋₋ ANPC.

5. Evaluation of JUMP-LINK (JMPL) Instructions

When issuing and predicting a JMPL instructions, FETCH sends predicted JMPL target address via WR₋₋ ANPC to Watchpoint. Watchpoint keeps the address, and evaluates the correctness by comparing the address and the calculated correct address by execution unit. If it turns out that the prediction was wrong, Watchpoint sends the calculated correct address via RD₋₋ ANPC to FETCH to re-fetch instructions from the correct address. The presided JMPL target address is stored into TARGET-RAM in the same way as branch case.

We suppose only FXAGU execution unit calculates JMPL target address. When FXAGU finishes execution of JMPL instruction, FXAGU₋₋ JMPL is asserted, FXAGU₋₋ CHKPNT designates the checkpoint number of JMPL, and FXAGU₋₋ DATA contains the calculated correct JMPL target address. Then the predicted JMPL address in TARGET-RAM indexed by FXAGU₋₋ CHKPNT Is read and the read data gets compared with FXAGU₋₋ DATA. The compare result gets latched and the latched signal is JMPL₋₋ MATCH (FIG. 35). JMPL₋₋ MATCH Is asserted if the predicted address and the calculated address are the same. Then JMPL₋₋ MATCH Is ANDed with WP₋₋ JMPL[i] and the output becomes EVAL₋₋ TRUE[i](FIG. 34). One cycle after FXAGU₋₋ JMPL Is asserted, EVAL₋₋ READY[i] is also asserted (FIG. 33).

WP₋₋ ACTIVE₋₋ VECB and WP₋₋ MISPRED₋₋ VEC[i] are generated for JMPL in the same manner as for branch instructions. One cycle after WP₋₋ MISPRED₋₋ VEC[i] is asserted, PSU 300 sends BACKUP as many as two signals to Watchpoint 304: BACKUP₋₋ CHKPNT and MISPRED (but only when the backup is due to JMPL misprediction). If MISPRED is asserted, Watchpoint sends two-time latched FXAGU₋₋ DATA signals which contains the correct JMPL address to FETCH (See FIG. 35). TARGET-RAM is used for two purposes: one is for storing alternate address of branch, and another is for storing predicted JMPL target address. The two usages are exclusive, so only one TARGET-RAM is enough for this implementation.

The inventive structure and method provide (1) Structure and method for inflate watching of plural predicted branch or jump-and-link instruction simultaneously; (2) Structure and method for grabbing plural Condition-Code data or calculated jump-and-link addresses for which predicted branch or jump-and-link instructions are waiting by watching data forward buses from execution units simultaneously; (3) Structure and method for being able to generate plural misprediction signals of branch or jump-and-link instructions simultaneously, either alone or in combination with (2); (4) Structure and method for storing alternate branch address or predicted jump-and-link address in one storage shared with the two above cases, either alone or in combination with (2); (5) Structure and method for sending the correct branch address or jump-and-link address for instruction fetch when misprediction happens, either alone or in combination with (4); and (6) Structure and method for speeding up critical paths, by: tag compares for grabbing CC data are split into two parts: one is cc tag in previous cycle compared to the data forward bus tag; another is currently renamed cc tag in the current issue window compared to data forward bus tag. Alone or in combination with (2)) For the latter case, the latched signal of renamed cc tag can be used for the compare so, it's not timing-crucial. FIG. 36 is a diagrammatic flow-chart of an embodiment of the inventive Watchpoint method for plural simultaneous unresolved branch evaluation.

B. Exception Detection

Exceptions may occur during issue or execution. Thus, exceptions include issue traps and execution traps. The detection of Issue Traps and Execution Traps are described below.

1. Detecting Issue Traps

The ISU 200 also detects issue traps which effect issuing of instructions. These issue traps may be syncing or non-synching issue traps. Those skilled in the art will recognize, the type of issue traps that are made syncing and non-syncing can be selected based on various criteria and subject to designer choice.

For example, non-syndng issue traps are typically those that occur often and for which syncing of the CPU 51 in the manner described earlier would reduce processor speed. Thus, these kinds of issue traps are not synced and entered into speculatively. These issue traps may include issue traps such as the fill₋₋ normal, fill₋₋ other₋₋ spill₋₋ normal, spill₋₋ other, clean₋₋ window, trap₋₋ instruction (a trap always immediate (TA %g0+simm7) instruction), unimplemented₋₋ idd, unimplemented₋₋ std, and illegal₋₋ instruction described in the SPARC-V9 Architecture Manual.

The non-syncing issue traps are typically of the type that do not occur often and for which syncing the CPU 51 would not significantly effect processor speed. These may include issue traps such as the SPARC-V9 instruction₋₋ access₋₋ error, instruction₋₋ access₋₋ exception, privileged₋₋ opcode, privileged₋₋ action, fp₋₋ exception₋₋ other, fp₋₋ disabled, emulation₋₋ trap, and trap₋₋ instruction (a conditional trap (Tcc) instruction) issue traps.

In order to detect whether certain types of these issue traps occurred during the issue stage, the ISU 200 receives control register (CNTRL₋₋ REG) fields from the control register file 800. As shown in FIG. 17, the control register file 800 contains the SPARC-V9 privileged registers including the clean windows (CLEANWIN) register 801, the restorable windows (CANRESTORE) register 802, the savable windows (CANSAVE) register 803, the windows state (WSTATE) register 804, and the processor state (PSTATE) register 805. It also contains SPARC-V9 non-privileged registers including the TICK register 806 and the floating point register status (FPRS) register 807. The CNTRL₋₋ REG fields include the CLEANWIN, CANRESTORE, CANSAVE, WSTATE₋₋ NORMAL, WSTATE₋₋ OTHER, PSTATE₋₋ PEF, PSTATE...PRIV, TICK₋₋ NPT, and FPRS₋₋ FEF fields described in the SPARC-V9 Architecture Manual and provided by the CLEANWIN, CANRESTORE, CANSAVE, WSTATE, TICK, and FPRS registers 801-807.

Turning back to FIG. 7, the ISU 200 decodes the FR₋₋ INSTs₋₋ BRPs instructions and utilizes the CNTRL₋₋ REG fields in accordance with the SPARC-V Architecture Manual to determine whether any of the SPARC-V9 issue traps occurred. Only the issue trap caused by the instruction in the earliest issue window slot will be taken. Therefore, when one or more issue traps are detected, only those of the instructions in the issue window slots prior to the slot of the issue trap causing instruction which is in the earliest slot can be issued by the ISU 200. The issue trap causing instruction and those of the FR₋₋ INST BRP₋₋ 0-3 instructions after the slot of the issue trap causing instruction will not be issued except that a TA or Tcc instruction that caused the (trap₋₋ instruction) issue trap will be issued.

When an issue trap occurs, the ISU 200 outputs ISSUE₋₋ TRAP signals to the PSU 300 that indicate that a trap has occurred and identify which of the issue traps described earlier has occurred. When a non-syncing issue trap is detected by the ISU 200, the ISSUE₋₋ TRAP signals will be output by the ISU 200 as soon as the issue trap is detected. However, when a syncing issue trap is detected by the ISU 200, then the ISSUE₋₋ TRAP signals will not be output by the ISU 200 until the issue trap causing instruction is in slot 0 and the CPU 51 is synced in the manner previously described. In the case of a Tcc instruction which causes a non-syncing issue trap, the Tcc instruction can only be issued once the CPU 51 is synced.

2. Detecting Execution Traps

Referring to FIG. 8, during execution of issued instructions, errors may occur which are detected by the FPU 600, FXU 601, and LSU 603. As indicated earlier, FPU 600, FXU 601, and LSU 603 output ERR₋₋ STAT signals to the PSU 200 of the ISB 61 that indicate if an error occurred during execution of an instruction. Execution errors from the ESU and FXU can be easily handled by the PSU 300. But, floating point exceptions require special handling as will be described next.

Referring to FIG. 8, as was discussed earlier, the FPU 600 executes floating point instructions out of predicted and/or actual PC order based on resource availability. During execution of floating point instructions, the FPU 600 may detect execution traps (i.e., errors). But, since the FPU 600 may execute instructions out of predicted and/or actual PC order, the execution traps they .cause may also be out of predicted and/or actual PC order. In order to properly handle and detect floating point execution traps as if they had occurred in actual PC order, the PSU 300 includes a floating point exception (FPEXCEP) ring or unit 306, as shown in FIG. 37.

As shown in FIG. 38, the FPEXCEP ring 306 includes a data storage structure 900 with 64 storage elements or entries. Each storage entry corresponds to one of the 64 instruction serial numbers and has an instruction identifying (FP) field, a floating polnttrap type (FTT) field, and a current floating point exception type (CEXC) field. As shown in FIG. 37, the data storage structure forms an FP field ring that has sixty-four addressable storage elements for storing the FF-FP fields, an FTT field ring that has sbdy-four addressable storage elements for storing the FTT fields, and an CEXC field ring that has sixty-four addressable storage elements for storing the CEXC fields. Each of the addressable storage elements of the FP, FTT, and CEXC field rings corresponds to an instruction serial number.

The FP bits are set ("1") or cleared ("0") to indicate whether the corresponding instructions are SPARC-V9 floating point type instructions or not. For the instructions in the FPEXCEP ring 306 which are identified by the FP bit as being floating point instructions, the FTT fields identify the type of SPARC-V9 floating point trap that occurred, As indicated in the SPARC-V9 Architecture Manual, this includes no trap, an IEEE₋₋ 754₋₋ exception, an unimplemented₋₋ FPop, an unfinished₋₋ FPop, a sequence error, a hardware₋₋ error, and an invalid₋₋ fp₋₋ register error. As those skilled in the art will appreciate, the CPU 51 could be implemented without specifying, detecting, and handling some of these types of traps, in which case the FTT fields of the FPEXCEP ring 306 could be made smaller so as to require less storage space. Furthermore, for the floating point instructions for which the FTT fields indicate an IEEE₋₋ 754₋₋ exception occurred, the CEXC fields identify the one or more types of IEEE₋₋ 754₋₋ exceptions that did occur in accordance with IEEE Std 754-1985 and the SPARC-V9 Architecture Manual. Thus, the CEXC field includes a bit to indicate if an operand is improper (nvc), a bit to indicate if an overflow occurred (ofc), a bit to indicate if an underflow occurred (ufc), a bit to indicate if a divide by zero occurred (dzc), and a bit to indicate if an inexact result occurred (nxc), But, for floating point instructions flat result in other types of floating point trap types or no floating point trap, the CEXC fields indicate that none of the types of IEEE₋₋ 754₋₋ exceptions occurred.

Like the A-ring 312 and M-ring 324 described earlier and shown in FIG. 11, the FPEXCEP ring 306 is implemented as a circular, ring, or wrap-around data structure where pointers are moved in along the data structure using "modulo-FPEXCEP-ring register length" arithmetic (here, modulo-64 arithmetic), as shown in FIG. 37. Those skilled in the art will recognize that, although a circular data structure is advantageous, it is not essential to the invention and other data structures implementing the features of the invention may be used.

Referring back to FIG. 38, during each issue stage, the ISU 200 outputs the ISSUE.sub.₋₋ VALID signal described earlier which indicates which of the fetched FR₋₋ INST₋₋ BRP₋₋ 0-3 instructions was issued. At the same time, it outputs an FP₋₋ ISSUE signal that identities which of the issued instructions is a floating point instruction. These signals are received by the FP write (WR) logic 901 and the FTT write (WR) logic 902. In addition, the FP WR logic 901 and the FTT WR logic 902 receives from the ICRU 301 the NISN pointer discussed earlier.

The FP WR logic 901 and the FFF WR logic 902 use the NISN pointer and the ISSUED₋₋ VALID signal to address the locations in the FPEXCEP ring that corresponding to the FP bits and the FTT fields for the instructions that were just issued by the ISU 200. For each of these instructions identified by FP₋₋ ISSUE as being a floating point instruction, the FP WR logic 901 sets the corresponding FP bit to indicate that it is a floating point instruction. And, for those of the issued instructions that are identified by FP₋₋ ISSUE as not being a floating point instruction, the FP WR logic 901 clears the corresponding FP bit to indicate that it is not a floating point instruction.

Referring to FIG. 8, as described earlier, the FPU 600, the FXU, 601, the FXAGU 602, and the LSU 603 execute issued instructions and output ERR₋₋ STAT signals when execution is completed. As shown in FIG. 39, the ERR₋₋ STAT signals include FP₋₋ ERR₋₋ STAT signals that contain the serial numbers, checkpoint numbers, and error status fields for floating point instructions executed and completed by the FPU 600. The error status fields indicate the floating point trap .type that will result from an executed floating point instruction or no floating point trap if one will not result and the current floating point exceptions caused by the floating point instruction or no current floating point exceptions if none were caused. In other words, the error status fields contain data representing the FFT and CEXC fields to be when to the FPEXCEP ring 306 for the floating point instruction.

Moreover, referring to FIG. 39, the FSPJCCRFRN 606 includes the SPARC-V9 floating point status register (FSR) 607. The FSR includes a trap enable mask (TEM) field that includes a masking bit for each of the IEEE₋₋ 754₋₋ exceptions described earlier so that one or more of these exceptions may be masked. The TEM field is provided to the FPU 602. When an IEEE₋₋ 754₋₋ exception occurs, the FP₋₋ ERR₋₋ STAT signals will not indicate to the PLSM 307 that an exception occurred if the TEM field indicates that it is of the type that should be masked. But, the FP₋₋ ERR₋₋ STAT signals will nevertheless indicate to the FPEXCEP unit that such an IEEE₋₋ 754₋₋ exception occurred (i.e., FTT) and also the type of IEEE₋₋ 754₋₋ exception that it is (i.e., CEXC).

For each completed floating point instruction, the FTT WR logic 902 uses the serial number provided in the FP₋₋ ERR₋₋ STAT signals to write into the corresponding FTT field of the FPEXCEP ring 306 the FR data identified by the FP₋₋ ERR₋₋ STAT signals. Furthermore, be CEXC write (WR) logic 903 uses this serial number to write into the corresponding CEXC field of the FPEXCEP ring 306 the CEXC data identified by the FP₋₋ ERR₋₋ STAT signals.

The read and accrued exception compute (RD and AEXC compute) logic 904 receives the RRP pointer and the COMMIT₋₋ VALID signal from the ICRU 301 of the PSU 300. The RRP pointer points to the last instruction retired in the previous machine cycle and the COMMIT₋₋ VALID signal indicates how far the RRP pointer will advance (i.e., the number of instructions that were retired) in the previous machine cycle.

During each machine cycle, the RD and AEXC compute logic 904 uses the RRP pointer and the COMMIT₋₋ VALID signal to read the FP bit and FTT and CEXC fields in the FPEXCEP ring 306 for each instruction that was retired in the last machine cycle. Then, for those of the retired instructions that are floating point instruction (as identified by the FP bits), the RD and AEXC compute logic 904 logical ORs their CEXC fields to compute an AEXC field. The AEXC field identifies the masked IEEE₋₋ 754₋₋ exceptions accrued by all of the floating point instructions retired in the last machine cycle since, as described shortly, the floating point instructions that cause non-masked IEEE₋₋ 754₋₋ exception will not have been retired and will have resulted in execution trap sequencing by the PLSM 307.

In addition, the RD and AEXC compute logic determines from the mad FP bits which of the instructions retired in the current machine cycle is the latest floating point instruction to be retired. If one or more floating point instructions were retired in the current machine cycle, the Rd and AEXC compute logic 904 then outputs WR₋₋ CEXC₋₋ AEXC₋₋ FTT signals that include a signal that contains the computed AEXC field and a signal that indicates that it should be written into the fsr.aexc field of the FSR607 in FIG. 39. Moreover, the WR₋₋ CEXC₋₋ AEXC₋₋ FTT signal also include signals that contain FTT and CEXC data for the most currently retired floating point instruction and signals that indicate that this data should be written into the fsr.ftt and fsr.cexc fields of the FSR in FIG. 39. In this circumstance, the FTT data will indicate no floating point trap type for several reasons. First, floating point instructions that don't cause execution exceptions can be retired and will have corresponding FTT fields in the FPEXCEP ring that indicate no floating point trap type. Second, floating point instructions that have FTT fields that indicate an IEEE₋₋ 754₋₋ exception trap but which caused one or more corrresponding IEEE₋₋ 754₋₋ exceptions that were masked by the TEM field of the FSR 607, can be retired since the PLSM 307 is not alerted that any of these execution exceptions occurred.

As mentioned previously, the PLSM 307 also receives the FP₋₋ ERR₋₋ STAT signals. When these signals indicate that an execution trap has occurred, then an execution trap sequencing process is initiated by the PLSM 307 which causes the CPU 51 to be synced (i.e., RRP=CSN=ISN) at the instruction prior to the trap causing instruction.

The PLSM 307 then generates a FPEXCEP₋₋ CHK signal when the CPU 51 is synced. In response to the FPEXCEP₋₋ CHK signal, the RD and AEXC compute logic 902 uses the RRP pointer to read the FP, FTT, and CEXC fields in the FPEXCEP ring 306 for the instruction which is at RRP+1.

If the read FTT field indicates no floating point trap, then the instruction at RRP+1 was not responsible for causing a floating point exception. Since some other kind of exception may have occurred at this instruction, the RD and AEXC logic 904 outputs the WR₋₋ CEXC₋₋ AF-XC₋₋ FTT signals so that they include signals that indicate that nothing should be written into the fsr.ftt.fsr.cexc, and fsr.aexc fields of the FRS 607 of the FRS 607.

But, if the mad FTT field indicates that a floating point trap occurred, then the instruction at RRP+1 was responsible for a floating point exception. The RD and AEXC logic 904 then outputs the WR₋₋ CEXC₋₋ AEXC₋₋ FTT signals so that they include a signal that contains the FTT field read from the FPEXCEP ring 306 for the instruction at RRP+1 and a signal that indicates that it should be read into the fsr.ftt field of the FSR 607 in FIG. 39. Thus, the trap type caused by the floating point instruction is contained in the fsr.fft field of the FSR so that a floating point execution traphandling routine can access the FSR 607 with a store FSR (STFSR) instruction to properly handle the trap.

In addition, if the read FTT field indicates that a IEEE₋₋ 754 ₋₋ exception occurred, then the WR₋₋ CEXC₋₋ AEXC₋₋ FTT signals output by the RD and AEXC logic 904 include a signal that contains the CEXC field read from the FPEXCEP ring 306 for the instruction at RRP+1 and a signal that indicates that it should be read into the fsr.cexc field of the FSR 607 in FIG. 39. As a result, the current exception type caused by the floating point instruction is contained in the fsr.cexc field of the FSR 607 so that the trap handling routine can now access this field of the FSR 607 with a store FSR (STFSR) and properly handle the trap.

Referring to FIG. 37, in this case, since floating point instructions are executed by the FPU 600 out of predicted and/or actual PC order, the instruction at RRP+1 may not have been the faulting instruction that caused the PLSM 307 to begin the execution trap sequencing process. In other words, a floating point instruction may have resulted in an execution trap that was detected earlier than an execution trap caused by another floating point instruction that was issued earlier O.e., has an earlier serial number) but executed later. However, the later issued but earlier executed instruction caused the start of execution trap sequencing by the PLSM 307, while sequencing prior to machine sync, if an earlier instruction results in an exception, then the PLSM 307 will switch to processing it. Thus, the execution trap sequencing nevertheless results in the later detected execution trap actually being handled instead of the earlier detected execution trap as if the execution traps had occurred in actual PC order.

Although the FPEXCEP unit has been described in the context of the SPARC-V9 architecture, those skilled in the art will appreciate that it may be implemented for any architecture that involves speculate execution of floating point instructions.

C. Recovery by Backtracking the Processor to an Earlier State

A CPU "becktrack" is initiated when either Watchpoint 304 detects a mispredicted instruction or when execution exception occurs in DFB 62 and triggers an execution exception (etrap) in PSU 300. Backtracking the processor may include a processor backup and/or processor backstep and described in greater detail below. More than one misprediction and execution exception can occur during a machine cycle. In the exemplary CPU 51, all speculatively executed control transfer instructions (e.g. predicted branch instructions) are checkpointed. Such a mispredicted instruction always lies at a "checkpoint boundary." Recovery from a checkpointed mispredicted instruction can be accomplished by restoring machine state that was stored in the checkpoint corresponding to that mispredicted instruction at the time it was issued. Execution exceptions, unlike mispredictions, may not correspond to a checkpointed instruction since not all instructions are checkpointed. In general, an instruction generating an execution exception may lie at any "instruction boundary". A checkpoint boundary corresponds to an instruction boundary only for speculatively issued control transfer instructions. Recall that not every speculatively issued instruction requires checkpoint formation, but rather only those speculative control transfer instructions that create a PC discontinuity (unless the control transfer instruction has been selected as a machine "syncing" instruction and is selectively not checkpointed as described herein). The manner in which the CPU 51 is backtracked therefore depends on the condition that initiated the recovery and whether the misprediction or exception corresponds to a checkpointed instruction.

The term "backup" as used herein refers to a structure and method for restoring machine state at a checkpoint boundary by restoring machine state previously stored in a checkpoint and then taking appropriate action to restart CPU 51 instruction issue and execution. As used herein, backup may or may not involve subsequent in-order reissue and re-execution of instructions forward from the checkpointed instruction. The term "backstep" as used herein, refers to a structure and method for restoring machine state at any instruction boundary, possibly in combination with a backup, and then taking appropriate action to restart CPU 51 instruction issue and execution.

When an execution trap (etraps) is encountered, the machine backtracks to the faulting instruction to preserve the precise state of the machine. Unlike mispredicts which lie on a checkpoint boundary, etraps may require backsteps, backups, or a combination of the two to reach the faulting instruction. There are no constraints in ordering or frequency of backstep or backup operations, other than the necessity of performing the operations. When used in combination, machine backup and backstep provide a method for efficiently recovering from mispredictions and execution exceptions and may advantageously do so, in some circumstances, without forcing re-execution of the instruction causing the exception or of the instruction between a checkpointed instructions and the faulting instruction.

Checkpoints are allocated whenever there is a change in processor flow (For example, Bcc, FBcc, jumpl, and the like instructions). The exemplary CPU 51 has up to sixteen checkpoints available for allocation. Backups are performed to restore machine state to a checkpoint boundary. Backsteps are performed to restore machine state to any instruction boundary. The exemplary machine is limited to backstepping up to four instructions per cycle by available hardware. Backups provide a coarse but fast backtracking mechanism for restoring machine state, and Backsteps provide a mechanism for restoring machine state at fine instruction boundaries. The machine can Backtrack to earlier state through any combination of Backups or Backsteps.

Two rules should be observed in order to realize precise state restoration using the inventive backstep procedure in conjunction with the inventive backup procedure. First, when instructions which may modify architectural control registers are encountered in the instruction stream, the CPU 51 Should either be synced prior to execution of the instruction, or the machine should checkpoint that instruction. If this first rule is observed, backstepping never requires any architectural control register modification or update. Second, all instructions that may create program counter discontinuities should be checkpointed. If the second rule is observed, backstepping Involves decrementing the PC by the number of backsteps and reclaiming and restoring machine resources including resources maintained in RRF 302) as they are allocated at the earlier corresponding Program Counter.

Backtrack Unit (BKTR) 305 functionally, located within PSU 300 and is responsible for implementing machine backups and backsteps as required for correct CPU 51 function and recovery. As shown in FIG. 40, BKTR 305 comprises Backtrack Control Unit (BTCN) 401 which is responsible for determining whether a machine backup, one or more machine becksteps, or combinations of backups and backsteps are appropriate to recovery the CPU 51 from mispredictions and exceptions. BTCN 401 receives SN, error, and status information from each execution unit in DFB 62 and from watchpoint 304. Backup Unit (BKUP) 402 is responsible for initiating and sequencing machine backups, and Backstep Unit (BKST) 403 is responsible for initiating and sequencing machine backsteps. The CPU 51 should stop issuing instructions, and backtrack using backup and backstep as appropriate td the instruction causing the exception or misprediction. Structure and method for backing up the CPU 51 using backstep, and for backstepping the machine are described in greater detail hereinafter.

1. Processor Backup to a Checkpoint Boundary

A machine backup will be initiated when: (1) PLSM 307 within PSU 300 attempts to enter RED Mode, or when (2) Watchpoint 304 detects a mispredicted instruction. A machine backup or may not also be initiated when (3) a faulting instruction (execution exception or etrap) is detected from DFB 62. Backup procedures differ, including selection of the checkpointed instruction to backup to, depending on the reason for initiating the backup. A backup may be followed by a backstep if the faulting instruction causing the execution exception does not coincide with a checkpoint boundary.

Each machine cycle, Backup Unit (BKUP) 402 receives instruction execution status information ERR₋₋ STAT from DFB 62 over the Data Forward Busses and mispredicted instruction information (WP₋₋ MISPRED) from Watchpoint 304. These signals identify the instruction serial number (SN), instruction checkpoint to which the machine should be backed up to if a backup is needed, an indication that an error has or has not occurred, and an error type indication (deferred, data breakpoint, Floating-Point operation, and the like). If the FXAGU does not handle multipication or division operations, then the ERR₋₋ STAT signals from that execution unit may not generally provide error information but will provide SN and checkpoint number information in the ERR₋₋ STAT signals. Although checkpoint are riot formed for every instruction that is issued, each instruction is assigned a backup checkpoint at the time it is issued. This checkpoint is allocated by ICRU 301 within PSU 300 prior to instruction issue, associated with the instruction by ISU 200 at issue, sent by ISU 200 to DFB 62 with the instruction operation code (op-code) and instruction serial number, and stored in one of the execution unit's queue. (For example, in FIG. 22, backup checkpoint is stored in checkpoint field 614.) Therefore, when the instruction completes execution, the serial number and checkpoint number are immediately available within the execution unit (i.e. FXU, FPU, FXAGU, or LSU).

2. Mispredicted Instruction, RED Mode, and Execution Trap Initiated Backup

A backup cycle is initiated by BKUP 402 whenever a mispredicted instruction is detected by Watchpoint 304 or when entering RED Mode, and may be initiated to recover from an execution exception. Recovery from an execution except on may require only backstepping, only backup, or a combination of a backup and one or more backsteps. BKUP 402 includes Checkpoint Vector Logic Unit 404 that evaluates the instruction execution status information received from DFB 62 and Watchpoint 304 each cycle and determines which instructions, if any, have been mispredicted or caused an execution exception. In the exemplary CPU, Logic Unit 404 performs an "OR" on each checkpoint received from DFB 62 or watchpoint 304. Select Earliest Checkpoint Logic 405 determines which of the checkpoints is the earliest so that etraps corresponding to later faulting instructions will not initiate a backup to checkpoints identified by Logic 404 which have already been killed. BKUP 402 takes into account mispredictions and execution exceptions when determining which checkpoint number to use for a backup.

The machine is backed-up to the mispredicted instruction checkpoint when the mispredicted instruction is the earliest checkpoint. For RED Mode initiated backup, the machine is backed up to checkpoint which is closest to, but greater On the A-Ring circular sense) than, the Committed Serial Number (CSN). For execution exceptions, the checkpoint selection is more complex and depends on the nature of the exception.

Execution exception (etrap) initiated backups, may require different backup checkpoint number calculations for deferred and non-deferred traps. For a normal non-deferred trap, if instruction i lying in checkpoint n faults at a time when ISN has moved beyond checkpoint n+1, the machine is backed up from ISN to checkpoint n+1, that is to the checkpoint after the faulting instruction. If checkpoint n+1 is not an active or valid checkpoint, either because no instructions requiring checkpoints have been issued or because no time-out checkpoints have been created, then a backup should not be performed. Instead, recovery using backstep(s) only, from ISN backward to the faurdng instruction is appropriate, unless the faulting instruction sits in the serial number slot immediately after a checkpoint. For example, If checkpoint m has been allocated and has serial number SN=10, then if the instruction sitting in slot SN=11 faults, a backup to checkpoint m is initiated, instead of a backup to checkpoint m+1. That is, the machine is backed up to the checkpoint before the faulting instruction.

When the checkpointed instruction corresponds to a speculative branch or other control transfer instruction, a program counter discontinuity exists between the checkpointed instruction and the next instruction. The exemplary backstep implementation does not backstep across Program Counter discontinuities and cannot be used in spite of there being only a single program instruction serial number difference. Program Counter and machine state can only be properly restored in this situation through a backup.

Deferred traps require a different backup destination calculation than non-deferred traps. If checkpoint m has been allocated and has serial number SN=10 for example, then if the instruction sitting in SN=11 faults and generates a deferred trap, the machine should be backed up to checkpoint m+1 (if it exists), instead of checkpoint m because ISN should point to the trapping instruction rather than to the instruction preceding the trapping instruction. If checkpoint m+1 does not exist then no backup is initiated. Instead, precise state is restored using only machine backsteps. Table 10 summarizes the backup actions taken for deferred and non-deferred traps under several conditions of checkpoint number and faulting instruction serial number.

Processor state restoration at the checkpointed instruction serial number when Backtrack 305 asserts signals (DO₋₋ BAKUP) comprising a control signal that informs CPU 51 units affected by machine backup that a backup is occurring, and four-bit data signals that inform each affected CPU 51 component of the checkpoint number to use in the backup. Since checkpointed state is stored locally in the machine, each CPU 51 unit is responsible for "restoring" state from storage areas within the affected unit in response to the DO₋₋ BAKUP signals.

                                      TABLE 10                                     __________________________________________________________________________     Backup actions taken for deferred and non-deferred traps under several         checkpoint                                                                     and serial number conditions for embodiment of inventive method.                        Does Trapping                                                                           Is Checkpoint n+1                                                     Instruction have SN                                                                     valid?                                                       Is trap Deferred or                                                                     immediately after                                                                       (Checkpoint n is                                             Non-deferred?                                                                           checkpoint SN?                                                                          assumed valid.)                                                                         Backup Action Taken                                 __________________________________________________________________________     Not Deferred                                                                            NO       NO       NO BACKUP                                           Not Deferred                                                                            NO       YES      Backup to n+1                                       Not Deferred                                                                            YES      NO       Backup to n                                         Not Deferred                                                                            YES      YES      Backup to n                                         Deferred NO       NO       NO BACKUP                                           Deferred NO       YES      Backup to n+1                                       Deferred YES      NO       NO BACKUP                                           Deferred YES      YES      Backup to n+1                                       __________________________________________________________________________

The CPU 51 units that are responsible for storing, maintaining, and restoring the checkpointed states, as well as the CPU 51 units responsible for sequencing the backup operation (particularly the units within PSU 300) receive and respond to the DO₋₋ BACKUP signals. Note that RRF 302 receives DO₋₋ BACKSTEP signals but not DO₋₋ BAKUP signals because RRF is directly involved only with backstepping the CPU 51 and restoring states in a step-by-step manner rather than with backups.

More specifically, referring to FIG. 6, the checkpoint storage unit 106 outputs, in the form of the CHKPT₋₋ PC and CHKPT₋₋ NPC signals, the checkpointed APC and NAPC values stored by it in the entry corresponding to the checkpoint number specified by the DO₋₋ BACKUP signals. These values are then stored in the APC and NAPC registers 112 and 113. Similarly, the control register checkpoint storage unit 817 outputs, in the form of the CHKPT₋₋ CNTRL₋₋ REG signals, the control register contents checkpointed for the checkpoint specified by the DO₋₋ BACKUP signals and these contents are then stored by the RD/WR update logic in the corresponding control registers in the control register file 800, as shown in FIG. 17. Moreover, referring to FIG. 16, the checkpoint storage unit 616 of each of the FXRFRN 604, the CCRFRN 610, and the FPRFRN 605 output, in the form of the CHKPT₋₋ MAP signals, the checkpointed rename maps for the checkpoint specified by the DO₋₋ BACKUP signals. The checkpointed rename maps are then stored back in the rename mapping logic 615 by the control logic 613. Furthermore, the checkpoint storage unit 702 of the Freelist Unit 700 outputs, in the form of the CHKPT₋₋ FREELIST signal, the checkpointed freelist of the physical registers of each of the FXRFRN 604, the CCRFRN 610, and the FPRFRN 605 which are then stored in the Freelist logic 701.

In the exemplary CPU 51, backups are initiated even as etraps are still being sequenced. Since etrap exception processing may require multiple cycles, it is possible for more than one etrap to be asserted by DFB 62 before the machine is synced (ISN=CSN=RRP) and able to take and process the trap. In one embodiment of the exemplary CPU 51, each of the error and status signals (ERR₋₋ STAT) from DFB 62 for each of slots 0 and 1 comprise single bit error indication signals, six-bit serial number signals (FX₋₋ SN, FP₋₋ SN, LS₋₋ SN, and FXAG₋₋ SN), and sixteen-bit one-hot checkpoint vectors (FXDF₋₋ CHKPNT, FPDF₋₋ CHKPNT, FXDF₋₋ CHKPNT, and LSDF₋₋ CHKPNT) that will be used to compute the proper backup checkpoint for each instruction. Furthermore, mispredicted instruction information signal WP₋₋ MISPRED is a sixteen-bit one-hot vector wherein assertion of bit-i indicates that the i-th checkpoint corresponds to a mispredicted instruction and required a backup. Checkpoint Vector Logic Unit 404 cumulatively OR's all of the sixteen-bit one-hot checkpoint vectors from each of slots 0 and 1 until the machine is able to vector into the trap table. The "ORed" checkpoint vector is fed into Select Earliest Checkpoint Logic 405 which determines the earliest checkpoint. Even if execution exceptions occur that correspond to later instructions, no backup to checkpoints which have already been killed through a prior backup will be initiated. In the exemplary CPU 51, the watchpoint mispredict signal (WP₋₋ MISPRED) is a sixteen-bit one-hot vector wherein assertion of bit-i indicates that the i-th checkpoint corresponds to a mispredicted instruction and required a backup.

3. Processor Backstep to Any Instruction Boundary

A machine backstep will be initiated only as a result of execution exceptions (etraps) generated from faulting instructions in DFB 62. Machine backstep frequently occurs in combination with machine backup but may be initiated without also initiating backup.

Backstep Unit (BKST) 403 is responsible for performing backsteps. Machine "backsteps" will only occur as a result of etraps generated from faulting instructions in DFB 62. When backsteps are performed, two events occur in the machine. First, resources are reclaimed (See ICRU 301 and RRF 302 description) and made available as pending instructions are killed. These resources include serial numbers, checkpoints, watchpoints, and allocated physical and logical registers. Secondly, ISN is decremented during backstepping but can never be decremented to go behind CSN and RRP, The faulting instruction still has its active-bit in A-Ring 312 set, thereby preventing CSN and RRP advancement. Only when the faulting instruction has executed successfully without error will the A-Ring bit corresponding to the instruction be cleared. (Except that when successfully handling deferred traps, the A-Bit (and M-bit) is clear to permit CSN (and NMCSN) advancement and eventual recovery of resources.)

Machine backstepping is initiated in BKST 403 by a backstep launch control signals (BACKSTEP₋₋ LAUNCH) and a backstep serial number identification signal (BACKSTEP₋₋ TO₋₋ SN) from PLSM 307 which identify the serial number of the instruction we want to use to backstep to. In response, BKST 403 staris sequencing the backstep procedure by generating a backstep notification signal (DO₋₋ BACKSTEP) that informs ICRU 301 and other CPU 51 units that Backtrack 305 is initiating a backstep mode. BKST 403 starts generating a signal that identifies a count of the number of instructions to backstep over and can be viewed as a satellite controller which can be initiated to fulfill a task by PLSM 307. BKST 403 starts the task at PLSM's request, and upon fulfilling the task, indicate the end of the task to PLSM, and await the next request.

BKST 403 handles becksteps for two types of conditions. The first type is a non-deferred etrap. The non-deferred etrap is signaled when a deferred trap signal is not asserted (ISA₋₋ DEFERRED₋₋ TRAP=0) by PLSM 307 and the backstep launch control signal is asserted (BACKSTEP₋₋ LAUNCH=1) to indicate an etrap which is not a deferred trap. In this case, a backstep amount is calculated in BKST 403 by determining the difference between the serial number to be backstepped to (BACKSTEP₋₋ TO₋₋ SN) and the Next Issued Serial Number (NISN). Using the next issued serial number NISN) rather than the Issued Instruction Serial Number (ISN) results in the machine backing up to the instruction just before the faulting instruction. This backstep amount is saved in a memory storage area within the CPU 51 and decremented until the instruction before the faulting instruction is reached.

The second backstep condition involves deferred etraps. A deferred etrap is signaled by signaled when a deferred trap signal is asserted (ISA₋₋ DEFERRED₋₋ TRAP=1) by PLSM 307 and the backstep launch control signal is asserted (BACKSTEP₋₋ LAUNCH=1) to indicate an etrap which is a deferred trap. In this case, a backstep amount is calculated in BKST 403 by determining the difference between the serial number to be beckstepped to (BACKSTEP₋₋ TO₋₋ SN) and the Issued Serial Number (ISN). Here, the machine is backstepped to the faulting instruction rather than the instruction before the faulting instruction. The calculated backstep amount will be one less than the normal non-deferred case.

In the exemplary CPU 51, a maximum of four instructions may be backstepped over in each machine cycle. Therefore, multiple backstep cycles of up to four instructions each are executed to arrive at the destination (backstep to) instruction. In general, there is no need to limit the number of instructions backstepped over in a single cycle. A further limitation in the exemplary embodiment is that the backstep method does not support backstepping over instructions that cause program counter discontinuities since decrementing the PC from ISN (or NISN) by the backstep amount may not result in proper state restoration.

A simple state machine consisting of two states, "IDLE" and "BACKSTEP," is used to sequence the backstep. While in IDLE state, assertion of "BACKSTEP₋₋ LAUNCH" results in a transition to state BACKSTEP. While in state BACKSTEP, DO₋₋ BACKSTEP is asserted, and two termination conditions are evaluated. Either of these two conditions will result in termination of the BACKSTEP and returning to state IDLE.

Restoring CPU 51 state during backstepping only involves updating machine register resources and decrementing the program counter (PC) by the backstep amount. As described, instructions which may modify architectural control registers either sync the machine or are checkpointed, therefore there is no need to restore architected control registers during a backstep. In the exemplary CPU 51, the following machine states are updated during a backstep: Program Counter (PC), Next PC, information stored in RRF, and information stored in the Rename Maps. Other Control Registers including Trap PC, Trap NPC, and Privileged registers in BRB 59 are not modified or updated by backstepping. Machine resources are reclaimed from the Register Files in conjunction with logical-to-old-physical mappings stored in the Register Reclaim Format File (RRF) 302. When the backstep notification signal is asserted (DO₋₋ BACKSTEP), it informs ICRU 301, RRF 302, and other CPU 51 units that a backstep mode is being initiated. At backstep, the number of RRF 302 items to be reclaimed and restored during each backstep cycle is equal to the number of instructions to be backstepped over as indicated by the backstep count signal (with DO₋₋ BACKSTEP).

Therefore, the CPU 51 units that are responsible for storing, maintaining, and restoring these states, as well as CPU 51 units responsible for sequencing the backstep operation (particularly the units within PSU 300) receive and respond to the backstep control signals including units within BRB 59, ISB 61, and DFB 62. RRF 302 receives DO₋₋ BACKSTEP signals but not DO₋₋ BACKUP signals because RRF is directly involved only with backstepping the CPU 51 and restoring states in a step-by-step manner rather than with backups.

Register Reclaim Format Unit 302 responds to the backstep asserted signal (DO₋₋ BACKSTEP) and the number of RRF items to be reclaimed and restored is equal to the backstep count within the DO₋₋ BACKSTEP signal. RRF contains the logical-to-old physical register map, that is, the assignment of logical to physical registers that hold source or destination data values. Since none of the register resources allocated to instructions in RRF 302, or the register maps, have been freed back to Freelist 700 by advancement of CSN or RRP, the actual data in registers has not been disturbed. RRF permits the physical registers (old physical register) to be reassociated with the logical register in the same relationship as when each backstepped instruction was originally executed. By restoring the register mappings on a step-by-step basis, the register state at each instruction is restored. From the standpoint of register resources, in effect, the machine is run backwards during backstepping. FIG. 18 shows a block diagram of RRF. FIG. 41 shows the manner in which the logical to physical mappings are restored in the register rename files FXFRN, CCFRN, FCCRFN, and FPFRN.

In the exemplary embodiment of the RRF, the logical to old physical register information comprising several signals (LOG₋₋ OPHYS₋₋ TAGS) are bundled together in Read/Write Control unit 365 for storage in either the data storage structure or unit 366. When the RRF is read out for restoration in the Register Rename Maps, the RRF data is unbundled to restore it to its original format. Those workers having ordinary skill in the art, in light of the teachings herein will realize that various storage formats and bundling/unbundling routines may be applied to the RRF data to minimize storage area.

Specifically, when backstepping occurs, the read/write logic 365 controls the storage unit 366 to output, in the form of the LOG₋₋ OPHY₋₋ S₋₋ TAGS₋₋ BKST signals, the logical to old physical register tag mappings corresponding to the instruction identified by the DO₋₋ BACKST signals. Then, referring to FIGS. 8, 16, 18 and 39, the logical to old physical register tag mappings are restored to the FXRFRN604, FPRFRN 606, and the CCRFRN 610. As shown in FIG. 16, the control logic 613 in response to the DO₋₋ BACKST signals restores these mappings to the rename mapping logic 615.

A more elaborate backstepping scheme may be implemented by maintaining additional information; however, the inventive backstepping method is simplified since program counter values correspond to instructions within a basic block, that is, there are no program counter discontinuities among the instructions that may be backstepped over. Backstep unit 403 merely signals a number of backsteps from the checkpointed instruction serial number, or from the current ISN when backsteps are used without backup, to arrive at the faulting instruction. If program discontinuities were present, merely decrementing the program counter would not necessarily result in proper restoration. However, those having ordinary skill in the art, in light of the teachings contained herein, would realize that by using more sophisticated backstepping techniques that program counter discontinuities could be tolerated.

The two backtrack mechanisms, machine backup and machine backstep, provide the Precise State Unit an efficient method and structure for undoing speculative instructions sequences. Machine backups allow the Precise State Unit to bdng the CPU 51 to a state corresponding to an active checkpoint boundary. Machine backsteps allow the Precise State Unit to backtrack the CPU 51 to a specific instruction boundary between checkpoint boundaries. Backups provides a coarse but fast method and structure for restoring machine state, while backsteps provide a fine but slower method and structure for restoring machine state. FIG. 41 is a diagrammatic flow-chart of an embodiment of the inventive method for maintaining and restoring precise state at any instruction boundary. FIG. 42 shows the manner in which the logical to physical mappings are restored in a register rename file.

FIG. 43 provides an illustrative example of a machine backup followed by two machine backsteps. Backsteps can be executed as single steps or as multiple steps backing over several instructions at a time. In this example the CPU 51 has already issued an instruction corresponding to pointer ISN when the instruction fault is detected. The machine responds by backing up the machine to the closest checkpoint after the faulting instruction. Instructions between the closest checkpoint and ISN are killed. Then the first backstep by an amount of four instructions brings the machine closer to the faulting instruction by reclaiming all resources dedicated to the four instructions (see First backstep) during issue of those instructions. Then, the second (and last) backstep by the amount of three instructions takes the machine right before the faulting instruction by reclaiming all resources dedicated the those remaining instructions (see second backstep region).

Backing up to a checkpoint is fast but it requires a lot of machine resources to store the checkpointed state. Since all predicted instructions cause a checkpoint to be made, state can be restored to a mispredicted instruction in one step. Backstepping is slower than backing up, but the backstep procedure of this invention allows machine state to be restored to the state which existed at the point of execution of a specific instruction, rather than at a checkpoint pdor to the faulting instruction. And, because of the inventive backstepping structure and method, machine state can be restored to a checkpoint after the faulting instruction, rather than to a checkpoint before a checkpoint as in conventional methods, and then backstepped to the faulting instruction.

D. Priority Logic and State Machine Operation During Exception & Misprediction Recovery

FIG. 44 shows an exemplary Priority Logic and State Machine (PLSM) 307 functionally located within CPU 51. PLSM 307 has several responsibilities, First, it identifies the earliest exception within a group of pending or concurrent exceptions, Exception conditions include RED Mode, issue traps (itraps), execution traps (etraps), interrupts, and mispredicts. Second, it priorities the exceptions and mispredictions arriving during a machine cycle among each other and among the currently handled exception and those that may be waiting to be handled. Third, it determines the possible state transitions between different types of exceptions and mispredictions. Fourth, it issues control signals that initiate Backtracking (Backup and/or Backstep), RED mode processing.

Various exception types that may occur during instruction issue or execution are now described so that the prioritization and handling of the exceptions and mispredictions by PLSM 307 may be better understood. RED traps are synchronous traps that may occur under various conditions and have the highest priority of all traps. RED Mode is described in the SPARC V-9 Architecture Manual. Itraps are issue traps generated by ISU 200 on instruction issue. These include any of the register spill/fill traps, any of the trap instructions (TA, Tcc), instruction access errors, illegal instructions, privileged opcode, and the like. Generally, issue traps have higher priority only compared to interrupts which have the lower handling priority. All other traps (mispredicts, etraps, or red traps) which are signaled will be to instructions which are temporally earlier than the trap.

Etraps are execution traps which are signaled from one of the data forward busses. Execution traps must be prioritized against other execution traps on the basis of SN order. This is because etraps may not always occur at a checkpoint boundary and Backsteps may be required to reach the faulting instruction. If the machine performs a Backup to reach the instruction, then any new exceptions will be to an earlier instruction. If an etrap is currently being sequenced, then any new mispredicts will be of higher priority. This is because mispredicted instructions always have a checkpoint available to them. If PSU 300 is not already sequencing any exceptions, then etraps and mispredicts should be prioritized against each other. Interrupts are another type of asynchronous trap. Interrupts have priorities lower than all other exceptions.

Mispredicts are signaled by the Watchpoint Unit 304 when Watchpoint detects that a speculatively issued control transfer instruction was mispredicted. If any non-RED exceptions are being sequenced, mispredicts do not need to be prioritized since they always lie on a checkpoint boundary and will occur to a temporarily earlier instruction. If no exception is being sequenced then mispredict will have higher priorities than interrupts and itraps, but must be prioritized against etraps.

Earliest Serial Number Selection Logic Unit (ESNSL) 481 receives instruction serial numbers for instructions that have completed execution and status information, including information that an exception occurred or not during execution and exception type information, from each execution unit in DFB 62, a signal (WP₋₋ MISPREDICT) from Watchpoint Unit 304 indicating any mispredictions that have occurred that cycle, the current ISN, and a feedback signal from ESNSL 481 indicating the SN of the exception being handled in the current machine cycle prior to receipt of the new exception information. from the last machine cycle (CURR₋₋ EARLIEST₋₋ SN). Signals from each of the execution units include ERR₋₋ STAT. For example, if exceptions occur for instruction SN=10 and SN=56 in a 4 location A-ring 312, the earliest exception cannot be determined without also knowing the value of ISN. If ISN=40, then SN=56 is the earliest exception; however, if ISN=6, then SN=10 s the earliest exception.

ESNSLU 481 informs Priority & Execution Switching Logic (PESL) Unit 482 of the earliest exception or misprediction so that PESL can prioritize exception and misprediction handling based on both the earliest SN criteria and on the exception type. PESL also receives issue trap signals (ISU₋₋ ITRAP) and interrupt signals (ISU₋₋.sub. INTERRUPT₋₋ PEND) from ISU 200, and a MISPREDICTED₋₋ EARLIER signal from Backtrack Unit 305 if Backtrack was able to determine that the misprediction occurred earlier than an execution trap based on a comparison of checkpoint information. PESL also receives a state signal from State Machine and Control Logic (SMCL) 483, which includes State Machine 484 and Exception Control Signal Generation Logic 484, identifying the current exception type (CURR₋₋ EXCEPTION₋₋ TYPE), if any, being handled (e.g. etrap, itrap, RED, or the like). Exception State is stored in State Machine 484. PESL 482 uses these inputs to prioritize the current and pending exceptions and generates a signal that identifies the new exception type for the present machine cycle (NEW₋₋ EXCEPTION₋₋ TYPE).

Exception Control Signal Generation Logic (ECSIG) 484 is responsible for generating several signals that inform other units within CPU 51 the state of the CPU and in some instances directs other CPU units to take further action in response to the state. More Specifically, ECSIG generates and sends a TAKE₋₋ TRAP signal to the Trapstack Unit that includes a control portion that a trap should be taken, and the kind of trap. It sends a DEFERRED₋₋ TRAP₋₋ INC to ICRU 301 indicating if a deferred trap has occurred so that CSN and NMCSN should be advanced by one to advance past the exception. ECSIG also sends several signals to Backtrack Unit 305 including a signal that tells Backtrack 305 which instruction SN to backstep to (BACKSTEP₋₋ TO₋₋ SN); which the existence of a RED mede exception and the instruction to Backup to (BACKUP₋₋ RED) in the event of a RED Mede exception. ECSIG 484 also generates instruction kill signals to DFB 62 (KILL₋₋ ALL) and to ISU 200 (ISSUE₋₋ KILL) that instruct DFB to kill execution of instructions in the execution queues and to stop issuing instructions in the ISU respectively as appropriate to the exception or misprediction being handled during that machine cycle.

PLSM 307 tracks and differentiates traps into five different types: interrupts, red traps, itraps, etraps, and mispredicts. Depending on which exception is currently being sequenced, other exceptions that are detected may or may not have higher priority. If new exceptions have higher priority, PESL 482 tells SMCL 483 to switch from sequencing the current exception to the new higher priority exception or misprediction. These potential state transitions in State machine 484 are based on the current exception type, whether a new error has been reported from the Watchpoint, ISU, or any of the six data forward buses, and whether the new exception is temporally earlier than the current exception.

Possible state transitions may occur as follows: RED--No other trap types will force a transition from state RED. ITRAP₋₋ Three trap types (mispredicts, etraps, red alerts) can force transition to another state, but interrupts will not force a transition. ETRAP--Red alerts and mispredicts force transitions and always have higher priorities, other etraps require prioritization, and interrupts have lower priorities, while itraps are impossible since the machine is either backing-up orwailjng for machine sync so that no instructions that could cause itraps are being issued. INTERRUPT--All trap types have higher priorities and can force transitions. MISPREDICT--Three trap types (mispredicts, etraps, red alerts) have higher priorities and do not require prioritization, interrupts have lower priorities, while itraps should not occur since instruction issue is being killed during mispredict handling. IDLE--Red traps have highest priority, followed by any one of the four trap types where simultaneous mispredicts and etmps will result in transition to BACKUP where a determination is made as to whether the mispredict or etrap occurred earlier based on a comparison of checkpoints. (Deferring to checkpoint based prioritization is preferred since Backtrack is able to make the determination more rapidly than priority; however, the prioritization may be performed in PSLM. Finally, itraps and then interrupts will be sequenced.

E. Handline of Traps with Trap Stack

As indicated previously, traps often occur in the instruction pipeline of FIG. 5 and must be handled (i.e., taken) by a trap handling routine. Referring to FIG. 17, when the PSU 300 detects an exception in the manner described earlier for which a trap is to be taken, the PLSM 307 generates TAKE₋₋ TRAP signals instructing the control register file 800 to take a trap and identifying the type of trap to be taken. In response, the rd/wr/update logic 816 reads the corresponding trap vector (TRAP₋₋ VEC) signal from the TBA register 812 and sends it to the BRB 59. Referring to FIG. 6, the PC logic 106 uses the TRAP₋₋ VEC signal to compute a new FPC, APC, and NAPC to fetch and issue the instructions of the corresponding trap handling routine.

So that traps that occur within a trap handling routine may be handled in a nested fashion (i.e., traps taken within taken traps), as specified by the SPARC-V9 architecture, the control register file 800 includes the trap stack unit 815, as shown in FIG. 17. The trap stack unit 815 is shown in greater detail in FIG. 45. It includes a trap stack 820 that is a data storage structure with storage elements or entries.

Each storage entry has four fields which are designated by the SPARC-V9 Architecture Manual as the trap program counter (TPC), trap next program counter (TNPC), trap state (TSTATE), and trap type (TT) fields. The TPC and TNPC fields contain at the time a trap is taken the APC and NAPC values in the APC and NAPC registers 113 and 114 of the BRB 59. As described in the SPARC-V9 Architecture Manual, the TSTATE field contains at the time the trap was taken the contents of the XICC register in the CCRFRN 610 shown in FIG. 39 and the contents of the ASI, CWP, and PSTATE registers 808, 809, and 805 shown in FIG. 17. The TT field identifies the type of trap taken.

Turning again to FIG. 45, in general, when a trap is taken, the current PC, NPC, TSTATE, and TT values are stored in the corresponding fields of one of the storage entries of the trap stack 820. The trap level (TL), which indicates the number of nested traps taken, is then incremented and a trap handling routine begins handling the taken trap. If however a trap occurs during the trap handling routine, then the PC, NPC, TSTATE, and TT values at the time of this second trap are stored in the corresponding fields of another one of the storage entries of the trap stack 820. Then, a second trap handling routine is called upon to handle the second trap. At the end of the second trap handling routine, a DONE or RETRY instruction is executed which causes the PC, NPC, and TSTATE values stored in the storage entry for the second trap to be written to the corresponding registers and the trap level to be decremented. As a result, the CPU 51 is returned to the state at which it was when the second trap was taken and the first trap handling routine resumes handling the first trap. Then, when a DONE or RETRY instruction of the first trap handling routine is executed, the CPU 51 is returned to its original state when the first trap was taken.

From the foregoing, it is evident that, as required by the SPARC-V9 architecture, the trap stack unit 815 includes multiple trap levels to support the handling of multiple nested traps. However, while the SPARC-V9 architecture only specifies a trap stack with four storage entries to support four trap levels, the trap stack 820 includes eight storage entries 0-7 to support the four required trap levels. The additional four storage entries are used so that the concept of register or storage element renaming can be extended to the trap stack unit 815 as described next so that traps may be taken and returned from speculatively. Moreover, as expressed earlier, the present invention will work with any number of trap levels so long as the number of storage entries are larger than the number of trap levels.

The trap stack unit 815 includes freelist logic 821 that stores a list of all of the storage entries of the trap stack 820 which are currently available for storing the TPC, TNPC, TSTATE, and TT values associated with traps. Referring to FIG. 46, the freelist register 822 stores during each machine cycle a list of the currently available storage entries in the form of an eight bit FREELIST vector signal. Each bit of the FREELIST signal corresponds to one of the storage entries of the trap stack 820 and identifies if that storage entry is currently available. For the first storage entry identified by the FREELIST vector as being available, the first-one-encoder 823 then encodes the vector into the WR₋₋ ENTRY signal which identifies this storage entry and serves as pointer for writing the TPC, TNPC, TSTATE, and TT values for the next trap to be taken.

The FREELIST logic 821 also includes an all-zero-detector 836. It determines when the FREELIST signal contains all zero bits and therefore indicates that no storage entries in the trap stack 820 are available. If this occurs, then it asserts the NO₋₋ ENTRY₋₋ AVAIL signal.

Referring now to FIG. 45, when the PSU 300 determines that a trap is to be taken, but the NO₋₋ ENTRY₋₋ AVAIL signal indicates that no storage elements are available, the TAKE₋₋ TRAP signals it issues will not indicate to take a trap until the NO₋₋ ENTRY₋₋ AVAIL signal indicates that a storage element is available. Moreover, the PSU 300 will assert the ISSUE₋₋ KILL and the FETCH₋₋ SHUTDOWN signals to stop issuing of any instructions by the ISU 200 and fetching of instructions by the BRB 59 until the NO₋₋ ENTRY₋₋ AVAIL signal indicates that a storage entry is available. This has the effect of syncing the CPU 51 so that, as will become clearer shortly, checkpoints are retired and storage entries in the trap stack 820 may be reclaimed and become available.

But, when the NO₋₋ ENTRY₋₋ AVAIL signal is not asserted, the PSU 300 outputs to the control register file 800 the TAKE₋₋ TRAP signals which, as indicated earlier, include a signal that indicates that a trap is to be taken and a signal that identifies the type of trap it is. In response, the control register read/write and update (RD/WR/UPDATE) logic 816 reads the contents of the ASI, CWP, and PSTATE registers 808,809, and 805 and provides them to the trap stack 820 of the trap stack unit 815.

At the same time, the trap stack 820 receives the WR₋₋ TPC₋₋ TNPC signals that contain the current APC and NAPC values to be written to the TPC and TNPC fields of the trap stack 820. And, as will be discussed later, the trap stack 820 receives the XICC data of the XICC register in the FSR/CCRFRN 610 of FIG. 8 when they become available.

In response to the TAKE₋₋ TRAP signals, the trap stack read/write control (RD/WR) logic 822 extracts the trap type (TT) field contained by the TAKE₋₋ TRAP signals and provides it to the trap stack 820. Then, the RD/WR logic 822 writes the received APC, NAPC, ASI, CWP, PSTATE, and TT values immediately into the appropriate fields of the storage element pointed to by the WR₋₋ ENTRY signal. Moreover, as described later, the XICC data are written into the TSTATE field of this same storage element in response to the WR₋₋ ENTRY₋₋ XICC signal when the contents of the logical XICC register become available.

Referring to FIG. 17, the control register RD/WPJUPDATE logic 816 then receives the old TL value from the TL register 811 and increments it. It then writes the new TL value back into the TL register 811.

As shown in FIG. 45, the flap stack rename mapping (RENAME MAP) logic 824 receives the new TL 5 value and the TAKE₋₋ TRAP and WR₋₋ ENTRY signals. Referring to FIG. 47, the RENAME MAP logic 824 includes TL1-4 (trap level 1-4) write multiplexers 826-829 and TL1-4 registers 830-833 which each correspond to one of the four trap levels. In response to the new TL value and the TAKE₋₋ TRAP signal, the control circuit 825 of the RENAME MAP logic 824 controls the TL1-4 write multiplexers 826-829 with the WR₋₋ MUX₋₋ CNTRL signals so that the WR₋₋ ENTRY signal is stored in the register that corresponds to the trap level identified by the new TL value and also so that the other registers re-store the same value they stored in the previous machine cycle.

Thus, the storage entry identified by the WR₋₋ ENTRY signal stored in one of the registers is mapped to the current trap level identified by the new TL value in the RENAME MAP logic 824. Furthermore, the storage entries identified by the signals stored in the other registers remain mapped in the same way as they were in the previous machine cycle.

Referring again to FIG. 46, the first-one-encoder 823 of the FREELIST 821 also receives the TAKE₋₋ TRAP signals. When the TAKE₋₋ TRAP signals indicate to take a trap, first-one-encoder 823 sends back to the OR circuit 835 an eight bit signal with the bit that corresponds to the WR₋₋ ENTRY signal set to "0". The OR circuit 835 also receives the eight bit FREE₋₋ ENTRY signal from the RRF logic 837 (shown in FIG. 45) whose bits identify those of the storage entries of the trap stack 820 that have been reclaimed in the last machine cycle and are now available. During a backup, the Or circuit 835 receives from the AND circuit 838 the eight bit BACKUP₋₋ FREELIST signal whose bits identify the storage entries that were available at the time the checkpoint that was backed up to was made. The bits of the signal received from the first-one-encoder 823 are logically ORed with the corresponding bits of the FREE₋₋ ENTRY and BACKUP₋₋ FREELIST signals and the resulting FREELIST signal is provided to the register 822. Thus, barring a backup, the FREELIST signal in the next machine cycle will indicate that the storage element corresponding to the bit in the WR₋₋ ENTRY signal that was set to "0" is no longer available.

Referring again to FIG. 7, at the same time that the PSU 300 generates the TAKE₋₋ TRAP signals, it also requests with the CHKPT₋₋ REQ signal that the ISU 200 allocate a checkpoint for the first issued instruction of the trap handling routine. In response, the ISU 200 outputs the DO₋₋ CHKPT signals to various blocks and units within the CPU 51, including the control register file 800.

Turning to FIG. 47, the RENAME₋₋ MAP₋₋ 1-4 signals are output by the TL1-4 registers 830-833 a therefore respectively correspond to the trap levels 1-4. Moreover, since these signals are output by the TL1-4 registers 830-833, they provide the current mapping of the storage entries to the trap levels 1-4.

But, as described earlier, when a trap is taken, the RENAME MAP logic 824 maps a new available storage entry to the new trap level (TL). But, the old mapping of another storage entry to this trap level must be kept track of in case backing up occurs as described earlier. Thus, referring to FIG. 48, the RRF logic 837 preserves these old mappings from the RENAME₋₋ MAP₋₋ 1-4 signals it receives from the RENAME MAP logic 824 until they are no longer needed.

When a trap is taken, the multiplexer 843 outputs the RENAME₋₋ MAP signal that corresponds to the TL (i.e., the old TL incremented by one) for the new trap. In other words, the multiplexer selects only the RENAME₋₋ MAP signal which will reflect a new mapping in the next machine cycle. This signal is then decoded by the decoder 842 into an eight bit signal indicating which of the storage entries is being replaced by the new mapping to the new trap level. Since the TAKE₋₋ TRAP signals will indicate that a trap is being taken, the decoded signal is provided via the AND circuit 841 to the RRF storage unit 839 of the RRF logic 837. But, when no trap is being taken, the AND circuit 842 provides the RRF storage unit 839 an eight bit signal with all bits set to "0".

The RRF storage unit 839 includes 16 storage elements or entries. Each storage entry corresponds to one of the 16 checkpoint numbers described earlier. Thus, when the DO₋₋ CHKPT signals indicate that a checkpoint is to be formed, the RRF read/write (RD/WR) control logic 840, writes the data received from the AND circuit 841 into the storage entry corresponding to the checkpoint number identified by the DO₋₋ CHKPT signals.

Thus, the RRF 837 maintains an unavailability list of each storage entry of the trap stack unit 820 which is not currently mapped to one of the trap levels by the current mappings of the RENAME MAP logic 824 but sill unavailable for mapping to one of the trap levels because its old mapping to a trap level may need to be restored in case of a backup to a checkpoint. In this case, the storage entry is kept in the unavailability list until the retirement of the checkpoint formed at the time that the storage entry was mapped to the trap level of the trap that caused the checkpoint to be formed.

The RRF RD/WR control logic 840 also receives the sixteen bit CHKPT₋₋ CLR signal from the PSU 300. Each bit corresponds to one of the checkpoint numbers and indicates if the corresponding checkpoint has been retired (or cleared) in the manner discussed earlier. In response to this signal, the RRF RD/WR logic reads out the data from the corresponding storage envy of the RRF storage unit 839. Since the CHKPT₋₋ CLR signal may identify multiple checkpoints that have been cleared, the bits of the data read from the corresponding storage entries are ORed and combined to form the FREE₋₋ ENTRY signal which is sent as the eight bit FREE₋₋ ENTRY signal to the FREELIST logic 821 shown in FIG. 46.

In the case where a checkpoint identified by the CHKPT₋₋ CLR signal was formed when taking a trap, the storage entry identified by the FREE₋₋ ENTRY signal has been reclaimed and is now available again since the corresponding checkpoint has been retired. As a result, this trap can no longer be undone. Thus, assuming that a backup has not occurred, the bits of the FREE₋₋ ENTRY signal are then ORed with the corresponding bits of the signal provided by the first-one-encoder 823 to provide the FREELIST signal for the next machine cycle.

In the case where the checkpoint identified by the CHKPT₋₋ CLR signal was not formed when taking a trap, the data read from the corresponding storage element will be all "0" bits and thus have no impact in the generation of the FREELIST signal.

As shown in FIG. 45, the trap stack unit 815 also includes a trap stack checkpoint storage unit 845. The storage unit 845 is shown in greater detail in FIG. 48. It includes a data storage structure 846 that has 16 addressable storage elements or entries with each storage entry having five fields.

The storage unit receives the FREELIST signal from the FREELIST logic 821 and the RENAME₋₋ MAP signals from the RENAME MAP logic 824. Then, when the DO₋₋ CHKPT signals indicate that a checkpoint is to be formed, the trap stack storage read/write control logic 847 writes the FREELIST and RENAME₋₋ MAP signals into the appropriate fields of the storage entry corresponding to the checkpoint number identified by the DO₋₋ CHKPT signals. Since the current FREELIST and RENAME₋₋ MAP signals have been stored when the checkpoint was formed, the current mapping of trap stack storage entries to trap levels and the current list of available trap stack storage entries have been checkpointed.

When the DO₋₋ BACKUP signals indicate that a backup to a checkpoint is being performed, the RD/WR control logic 847 reads out the checkpointed FREELIST and RENAME₋₋ MAP signals form the storage element corresponding to the checkpoint number identified by the DO₋₋ BACKUP signals. The FREELIST signal is read out as the BACKUP₋₋ FREELIST signal while the RENAME₋₋ MAP signals are read out as the BACKUP₋₋ MAP signals.

As shown in FIG. 46, the FREELIST logic 821 receives the BACKUP₋₋ FREELIST and DO₋₋ BACKUP signals. Since the DO₋₋ BACKUP signals indicate that a backup is occurring, the AND circuit 838 provides the BACKUP₋₋ FREELIST to the OR circuit 835. As indicated previously, the bits of the signal received from the first-one-encoder 823 are logically ORed with the corresponding bits of the FREE₋₋ ENTRY and BACKUP₋₋ FREELIST signals to produce the FREELIST signal.

Referring to FIG. 47, the RENAME₋₋ MAP logic 824 receives the BACKUP₋₋ MAP and DO₋₋ BACKUP signals. Since the DO₋₋ BACKUP₋₋ signals indicate that a backup is occurring, the WR₋₋ MUX₋₋ CNTRL signals the control circuit 825 generates provide the BACKUP_(MAP) ₋₋ 1-4 signals to the TL1-4 registers 830-833, respectively. As a result, the mapping of trap stack storage elements to trap levels that existed when the checkpoint was made has been reinstated.

As mentioned earlier, the CPU 51 issues and executes instructions speculatively. Since the trap stack unit 815 includes a mechanism to restore a previous trap level in case of a backup, it enables the CPU 51 to speculatively take and return from traps.

The ability of the CPU to take and return from traps speculatively is illustrated in FIG. 51. As shown, initially the execution sequence is at trap level 0 and trap levels 1-4 are mapped to trap stack storage entries 1-4, respectively. When the first trap is taken, the trap level is incremented to trap level 1, the checkpoint 1 is formed with the trap level to storage entry mappings at checkpoint 1 being checkpointed, and a new mapping of trap level 1 to storage entry 5 is made. A new checkpoint is made at checkpoint 2 for an instruction such as a predicted program control instruction with the trap level to storage entry mappings at checkpoint 2 being checkpointed. A second trap is then taken and the trap level is incremented to trap level 2, the checkpoint 3 is formed, the trap level to storage entry mappings at checkpoint 3 are checkpointed, and a new mapping of trap level 2 to storage entry 6 is made. When a done or retry instruction in the trap handler for the trap at trap level 2 is executed, the trap level is decremented to trap level 1, the checkpoint 4 is formed, and the trap level to storage entry mappings at checkpoint 4 are checkpointed. After returning to the trap handler for the trap at trap level 1, a checkpoint is made at checkpoint 5 for an instruction of this trap handler with the trap level to storage entry mappings at checkpoint 5 being checkpointed. When another trap is taken, the trap level is incremented to trap level 2, the checkpoint 6 is formed, the trap level to storage entry mappings at checkpoint 6 are checkpointed, and a new mapping of trap level 2 to storage entry 7 is made. When yet another trap is taken, the trap level is incremented to trap level 3, the checkpoint 7 is formed, the trap level to storage entry mappings at checkpoint 7 are checkpointed, and a new mapping of trap level 3 to storage entry 0 is made. When a done or retry instruction in the trap handler for the trap at trap level 3 is executed, the trap level is decremented to trap level 2, the checkpoint 8 is formed, and the trap level to storage entry mappings at checkpoint 8 are checkpointed. Then, if it is determined that the program control instruction for which checkpoint 2 was formed was mispredicted, then a backup to checkpoint 2 occurs with the trap level to storage entry mapping at checkpoint 2 being restored. Thus, the traps for which checkpoints 3 and 7 were formed were taken and returned from speculatively while the trap for which checkpoint 6 was formed was taken speculatively.

As mentioned earlier, the TSTATE field of the trap stack includes a XICC field which holds the contents (i.e., XICC data) of the physical register mapped as the logical XICC register in the FSR/CCRFRN 606 in FIG. when the trap was taken. Since fixed point instructions may be executed out of PC order by the FXU 601 and FXAGU 602, these contents may not be available at the time a trap occurs. Thus, without a mechanism for obtaining the correctXICC data at a later time, the PSU 300 would have to wait until the XICC data is available to take a trap.

However, referring to FIG. 45, the trap stack unit 815 includes such mechanism, namely the XICC grabbing logic 823. The XICC grabbing logic 823 receives from the FSR/CCRFRN 606 the CC₋₋ TAGS₋₋ C, CC₋₋ DV₋₋ C, CC₋₋ TAGS₋₋ F, and CC₋₋ DV₋₋ F signals while the trap stack 820 receives the CC₋₋ DATA₋₋ C and CC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F signals.

Referring to FIG. 52, CC₋₋ DATA₋₋ C signals contain the XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ C signal and the CC₋₋ DV₋₋ C signals contain the XICC₋₋ DV₋₋ C signal. The XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ C signal contains the current contents, if available, of the logical XICC register (i.e., the physical register mapped as the logical XICC register by the CCRFRN 610 shown in FIG. 39) in the machine cycle when a trap is taken. The XICC₋₋ DV₋₋ C signal indicates if the contents of the XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ C signal is valid i.e. if the contents of the physical register currently mapped as the logical XICC register is available yet).

The contents of the physical register mapped as the logical XICC register at the time the trap is taken may already be available at that time. When this occurs, the XICC₋₋ DV₋₋ C signal indicates that the contents of the XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ C signal is valid and the TAKE₋₋ TRAP signals received from the PSU 300 indicate that a trap is being taken. In response, the XICC write logic 825 provides a WRI₋₋ ENTRY₋₋ XICC signal that corresponds to the entry identified by the WR₋₋ ENTRY signal. When this occurs, the RD/WR control logic 822 of the trap stack unit 815 then writes the contents of the XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ C signal into the XICC field of the TSTATE field of the entry of the trap stack 820 identified by the WR1₋₋ ENTRY₋₋ XICC signal.

However, when the XICC₋₋ DV₋₋ C signal indicates that the contents of the XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ C signal is not valid at the time the trap is taken, then the contents of the XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ C signal are not written to the trap stack 820. In this case, the trap stack unit 815 must wait until the contents of the physical register mapped as the logical XICC register at the time the trap was taken becomes available. Referring to FIG. 53, in order to do this, the XICC grabbing logic 823 includes the current match logic 826 and the later match array logic 827.

Still referring to FIG. 53, the CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ C signals include the XICC₋₋ TAG₋₋ C signal which contains the physical register tag of the physical register mapped as the logical XICC register when the trap was taken. Moreover, the CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ F signals include the FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ TAG₋₋ F and FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ TAG₋₋ F signals respectively forwarded by the FXU 601 and FXAGU 602 when they execute fixed point instructions which modify the logical XICC register. These signals contain the physical register tags of the physical registers mapped as the logical XICC register for these executed fixed point instructions and to which the contents in the FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F and FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F signals of the CC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F signals are to be written. The FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F and FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F signals are respectively forwarded by the FXU 601 and the FXAGU 602.

The CC₋₋ DV₋₋ F signals include the FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ TAG₋₋ F and FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ TAG₋₋ F signals respectively forwarded by the FXU 601 and FXAGU 602 when they execute fixed point instructions which modify the logical XICC register. These signals indicate whether the contents in the FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F and FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F signals to be written to the physical registers mapped as the logical XICC register for the executed fixed point instructions are valid (i.e., available).

As indicated earlier, since instructions may be executed out of actual and/or predicted program order, the forwarded FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F and FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F signals will eventually contain the contents to be written to the physical register mapped as the logical XICC register when the trap was taken. This may occur in the same machine cycle in which the trap is taken (i.e., the current machine cycle) or in a later machine cycle.

In the case where this occurs in the same machine cycle, the XICC₋₋ TAG₋₋ C signal currently identifies the tag of the physical register mapped as the logical XICC register when the trap was taken. The tag identified by the XICC₋₋ TAG₋₋ C signal is compared by the compare logic 850 and the compare logic 851 of the current match logic 826 with the tags respectively identified by the FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ TAG₋₋ F and FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ TAG₋₋ F signals. If a match occurs, and the corresponding FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DV₋₋ F or FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DV₋₋ F signal indicates that the contents in the corresponding FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F or FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F signal is valid, then the current match logic 826 outputs a corresponding FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ CURR₋₋ MATCH or FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ CURR₋₋ MATCH signal. This signal indicates that the contents of the physical register mapped as the logical XICC register when the trap was taken have become available in the same machine cycle in which the trap is taken.

Referring back to FIG. 52, during this machine cycle, the TAKE₋₋ TRAP signals still indicate that a trap is being taken and the WR₋₋ ENTRY signal still identifies the entry mapped to the trap level of the trap. Thus, in response to the FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ CURR₋₋ MATCH or FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ CURR₋₋ MATCH signal, the XICC write log 825 generates the corresponding WR2₋₋ ENTRY₋₋ XICC or WR3₋₋ ENTRY₋₋ XICC signal. This signal corresponds to the entry identified by the WRENTRY signal. The RD/WR control logic 822 of the trap stack unit 815 then writes the contents of the FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F or FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F signal into the XICC field of the TSTATE field of the entry of the trap stack 820 identified by the corresponding WR2₋₋ ENTRY₋₋ XICC or WR3₋₋ ENTRY₋₋ XICC signal.

Turning to FIG. 53, as indicated earlier, at a machine cycle after the machine cycle in which the trap was taken, the forwarded FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F and FXAGU₋₋ XICC_(') DATA₋₋ F signals may contain the contents to be written to the physical register mapped as the XICC register when the trap was taken. So as to provide for this situation, the XICC grabbing logic 823 includes the later match array logic 827 which includes the tag array storage unit 854.

The storage unit 854 includes eight storage entries. Each entry corresponds to one of the entries of the trap stack 820. Thus, each time the TAKE₋₋ TRAP signals indicate that a trap is being taken, the RD/WR logic 855 writes the tag identified by the XICC₋₋ TAG₋₋ C signal at that time to the entry of the storage unit 854 that corresponds to the entry of the trap stack 820 identified by the WR₋₋ ENTRY signal.

The compare array logics 852 and 853 respectively compare the tags identified by the FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ TAG₋₋ F and FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ TAG₋₋ F signals with each of the tags stored in the storage unit 854. As a result, if any matches occur, and the corresponding FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DV₋₋ F or FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DV₋₋ F signal indicates that the contents of the corresponding FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F or FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F signal is valid, then the corresponding compare array logic 852 or 853 outputs the corresponding FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ LATE₋₋ MATCH or FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ LATE₋₋ MATCH signal which identifies the entry of the trap stack 820 to which the contents of the corresponding FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F or FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F signal are to be written.

Turning to FIG. 54, the XICC grabbing logic includes the wait for XICC logic 828. The register 856 stores the WAIT₋₋ FOR₋₋ ₋₋ XICC₋₋ VEC vector signal. Each bit of the WAIT₋₋ FOR₋₋ XICC₋₋ VEC vector signal corresponds to one of the entries of the trap stack 820 and is asserted when the corresponding entry is waiting for the contents of the physical register mapped as the logical XICC register at the time the corresponding trap was taken to become available. Thus, the WAIT₋₋ FOR₋₋ XICC₋₋ VEC vector signal provides a list of all of the entries of the trap stack 820 which are currently waiting for the contents of various physical registers mapped as the logical XICC register at the time the corresponding traps were taken to become available.

Each time a trap is taken as indicated by the TAKE₋₋ TRAP signals, and the XICC DV C signal indicates that the contents of the physical register mapped as the logical XICC register are not available at this time, and neither the FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ CURR₋₋ MATCH signal nor the FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ CURR₋₋ MATCH signal indicate this either, then the WR₋₋ ENTRY signal identifies an entry which is waiting for these contents to become available in a later machine cycle. In response, this entry is added by the wait for XICC logic 828 to the list provided by the WAIT₋₋ FOR₋₋ XICC₋₋ VEC vector signal of the entries of the trap stack 820 currently wailing for the contents to become available of the various physical registers mapped as the logical XICC register at the time the corresponding traps were taken.

However, as indicated earlier, when a trap is taken as indicated by the TAKE₋₋ TRAP signals, the XICC₋₋ DV₋₋ C signal may indicate that the contents of the physical register mapped as the logical XICC register are available at this time or the FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ CURR₋₋ MATCH signal or the FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ CURR₋₋ MATCH signal may indicate this. each time this occurs, the entry identified by the WR₋₋ ENTRY signal is not added by the wait for XICC logic 828 to the list provided by the WAIT₋₋ FOR₋₋ XICC₋₋ VEC vector signal.

Moreover, as indicated earlier, whenever the contents of a physical register mapped to the logical XICC register at the time the corresponding trap was taken has become available in a later machine cycle, the FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ LATE₋₋ MATCH or FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ LATE₋₋ MATCH signal will identify the entry of the trap stack 820 to which these contents are to be written. Turning also to FIG. 52, since at this point the WAIT₋₋ FOR₋₋ XICC₋₋ VEC vector signal still lists this entry, the XICC write logic 825 generates the correspondin WR2₋₋ ENTRY₋₋ XICC or WR3₋₋ ENTRY₋₋ XICC signal which identifies this entry. The RDANR control logic 822 of the trap stack unit 815 then writes the contents of the FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F or FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F signal (i.e., the contents of a physical register mapped to the logical XICC register at the time the corresponding trap was taken) into the XICC field of the TSTATE field of the entry of the trap stack 820 identified by the corresponding WR2₋₋ ENTRY₋₋ XICC or WR3₋₋ ENTRY₋₋ XICC signal. Then, referring back to FIG. 54, this entry is removed by the wait for XICC logic 828 from the list provided by the WAIT₋₋ FOR₋₋ XICC₋₋ VEC vector signal.

Thus, for each trap taken and not yet returned from, the XICC grabbing logic is able to determine when the contents of the physical register mapped as the logical XICC register when the trap was taken becomes available and to which entry in the trap stack 820 these contents are to be written. As a result, nested traps may be taken even though these contents may not yet be available for any of the traps when they are taken. In other words, the XICC grabbing logic 823 is a mechanism that allows traps to be taken prior to all of the corresponding trap state (TSTATE) data being available.

However, upon return from taking a trap, the contents of the physical register mapped as the logical XICC register when the trap was taken must have been written into the corresponding entry of the trap stack 820. This is due to the fact that a RETRY or DONE instruction requires that these contents be written back into the physical register currently mapped as the logical XICC register.

As shown in FIG. 54, to insure that this occurs, the wait for XICC logic 828 includes a multiplexer 857. In response to the RD₋₋ ENTRY signal, which identifies the entry of the trap stack 820 currently mapped to the trap level of the current trap being taken, the multiplexer outputs the bit of the WAIT₋₋ FOR₋₋ XICC₋₋ VEC vector signal that corresponds to this entry as the WAIT₋₋ FOR₋₋ XICC signal. Thus, this signal indicates whether or not the entry of the trap stack 820 currently mapped to the trap level of the current trap being taken is waiting for the contents of the physical register mapped as the logical XICC register when the trap was taken.

Referring to FIG. 45, the XICC grabbing logic 823 outputs to the ISU 200 the WAIT₋₋ FOR₋₋ XICC signal. If this signal is asserted, then the ISU 200 will not issue a RETRY or DONE instruction until the signal is no longer asserted.

When the ISU 200 finally issues a RETRY or DONE instruction, it outputs DONE₋₋ RETRY₋₋ IS signals that includes a signal that indicates if a DONE instruction was issued and a signal that indicates if a RETRY instruction was issued.

Referring to FIG. 47, the read multiplexer 835 outputs as the RD₋₋ ENTRY signal the RENAME₋₋ MAP signal that corresponds to the current TL value. And, referring to FIG. 45, the RD/WR control logic 822 of the trap stack unit 815 reads the TPC, TNPC, ASI, CWP, PSTATE and XICC values out from the storage element identified by the RD.₋₋ ENTRY signal when the DONE₋₋ RETRY₋₋ IS signals indicate that a DONE or RETRY instruction has been issued.

Referring to FIG. 17, the ASI, CWP, and PSTATE values are written into their corresponding registers by the RD/WR/UPDATE logic 816 of the control register file 800 in response to the DONE₋₋ RETRY₋₋ IS signals.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 45, the TPC and TNPC values are provided to the BRB 59 with the RD₋₋ TPC₋₋ TNPC signals. As a result, the BRB 59 uses this values to form the PC and NPC values to fetch the next set of instructions.

Finally, the XICC values are provided to the DFB 62 with the RD₋₋ XICC signal. Referring to FIG. 8, in response to the DONE₋₋ RETRY₋₋ IS signal, the CCRFRN 610 maps the logical XICC register to a physical register. Thus, when the CCRFRN 610 receives the XICC data from the trap stack unit 815, it stores it in the newly mapped physical register.

Moreover, those skilled in the art will appreciate that the FXU 601 and the FXAGU 602 may each have more than one execution unit which can execute fixed point instructions that modify the logical XICC register. In this case, the XICC grabbing logic 823 would have duplicate logic to that already described in order to properly update the trap stack 820 with the contents of the physical register mapped as the logical XICC register at the time a trap is taken.

In addition, those skilled in the art will appreciate that the concept of the XICC grabbing logic 823 may be extended to other types of registers for which the contents may not be available at the time a trap is taken but need to be written to a trap stack and for which register renaming i.e., mapping of physical registers to logical registers) has been implemented.

All publications and patent applications mentioned in this specification are herein incorporated by reference to the same extent as if each individual publication or patent application was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference.

The invention now being fully described, it will be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art that many changes and modifications can be made thereto without departing from the spirit or scope of the appended claims. 

We claim:
 1. In a central processing unit having an issue unit for issuing instructions, an execution unit for executing instructions, and a data forward distribution bus communicating execution results from said execution units to other units within said central processing unit, a method for simultaneously monitoring the execution results of a plurality of speculatively issued predicted instructions; said method comprising the steps of:providing a watchpoint unit having a plurality of watchpoint registers for storing watchpoint data coupled to receive execution result signals from said execution unit over said data forward distribution within the processor; allocating a watchpoint register for storing watchpoint data including a predicted condition data result for each said speculatively issued predicted instruction, said predicted condition data result identifying the predicted value of a condition on which the control flow transfer direction depends and on the basis of which the speculatively issued predicted instruction was speculatively issued; monitoring execution result signals for said speculatively issued predicted instructions that are transmitted over said data forward busses; detecting occurrence of predetermined events based on said stored watchpoint data and execution result signals including an actual known condition data result signal and predetermined rules, said actual known condition data result signal identifying the actual value of a condition on which the control flow transfer direction of said speculatively issued predicted instruction should be determined; comparing said watchpoint data stored in said watchpoint register for one of said speculatively issued predicted instructions with said result signals arriving over said data forward busses pertaining to said speculatively issued instruction to determine if said signals match or do not match, a match indicating that said speculatively issued predicted instruction was correctly predicted and a non-match indicating that said speculatively issued predicted instruction was mispredicted; and if said comparing indicates that said prediction was a misprediction, then recovering said central processing unit to an earlier central processing unit state so that instructions executed on the basis of said misprediction are undone.
 2. The method of claim 1, further comprising the steps of:deallocating said watchpoint element after said step of recovering said central processing unit so that execution result signals appearing on said data forward busses no longer result in detecting occurrence of said predetermined events.
 3. The method of claim 1, wherein said step of recovering said central processing unit comprises the steps of:supplying a new instruction address to said issue unit corresponding to a correct instruction stream corresponding to said actual known condition data result signal can be fetched and issued to correct the misprediction; restoring central processing unit machine state to a state just prior to said and restarting instruction execution so that instructions executed on the basis of said misprediction are undone initiating execution for said new instruction in said correct instruction stream based on said fetched instruction.
 4. The method of claim 3, wherein said method further comprises the step of storing central processing unit machine state in a checkpoint data store prior to execution of said speculatively issued predicted instruction; andsaid step of restoring central processing unit state comprises restoring central processing unit state from said checkpoint data store prior to said step of initiating execution for said new instruction.
 5. The method in claim 4, wherein said step of recovering said central processing unit to an earlier central processing unit state further comprises backing up said central processing unit to recover said earlier state.
 6. The method in claim 4, wherein said step of recovering said central processing unit to an earlier central processing unit state further comprises backing up and backstepping said central processing unit to recover said earlier state.
 7. The method of claim 1, wherein said watchpoint data stored in said watchpoint register for one of said speculatively issued predicted instructions comprises WP₋₋ COND signal; and said result signals arriving over said data forward busses comprise execution unit condition code data selected from the group consisting of XCC₋₋ ₋₋ DATA₋₋ C, ICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ C or FCC₋₋ DATA₋₋ C, FXU₋₋ XCC₋₋ DATA, FXU₋₋ ICC₋₋ DATA, FXAGU₋₋ FXU₋₋ ICC₋₋ DATA, and FPU₋₋ FCC₋₋ DATA.
 8. The method in claim 1, wherein said instructions comprise predicted branch instructions.
 9. The method in claim 1, wherein said instructions comprise jump-and-link instructions.
 10. The method in claim 1, wherein said instructions comprise predicted branch and jump-and-link instructions.
 11. The method in claim 1, wherein said new address is stored in a data store within a watch point unit.
 12. In a central processing unit (CPU) having an instruction issue unit for issuing instructions, an execution unit for executing issued instructions, and a plurality of data forward buses for communicating execution results from said execution unit to other components of said CPU, a method for simultaneously grabbing execution result data for which predetermined instructions are waiting from said execution result generation units; said method comprising the steps of:receiving an enable control signal from each execution result source unit from which said result data may be grabbed; receiving a result data type signal from each said execution result source unit; receiving a select source signal indicating from which of said execution result source units said result data will be received and an indication of a time relative to a current clock cycle that said result data is expected; generating a data grab enable signal in response to receipt of said enable control signal, said result data type signal, and said select source signal according to predetermined rules to define a selected execution result source unit; monitoring execution result data signals from said execution result source units; grabbing execution result data from said selected execution result sources unit in response to said arriving execution result data and said grab data enable signal; and storing said grabbed execution result data for evaluation in a data store within said central processing unit.
 13. The method in claim 12, further comprising the steps of:initiating evaluation of said grabbed execution result data in response to generation of at least one data grab enable signals.
 14. The method in claim 12, further comprising the steps of:receiving an inhibit control signal; and inhibiting said step of generating said data grab enable signal when said inhibit selection signal is received.
 15. The method in claim 14, wherein said inhibit control signal includes a condition code renamed signal from said condition code rename unit indicating that condition code is modified by instructions issued in the current machine cycle and that condition cedes that may appear on said data forward busses during the current cycle may not be valid during the current cycle.
 16. The method in claim 12, wherein said execution result data comprises condition-code data.
 17. The method in claim 12, wherein said execution result data comprises renamed condition-code data.
 18. The method in claim 12, wherein said execution result data comprises condition-code data received from a floating-point execution unit, an integer execution unit, and an address generation unit; and renamed condition-code data received from a condition code rename unit;said condition code data and said renamed condition-code data received during the same machine cycle.
 19. The method in claim 12, wherein said execution result data comprises condition-code data, and wherein said predetermined instructions comprise predicted control flow transfer instructions including predicted branch instructions.
 20. The method in claim 12, wherein said execution result data comprises calculated jump-and-link addresses and wherein said predetermined instructions comprise jump-and-link instructions.
 21. The method in claim 12, wherein said execution result data comprises condition-code data and calculated jump-and-link addresses and wherein said predetermined instructions comprise predicted branch instructions and jump-and-link instructions.
 22. The method in claim 12, wherein said execution result source units include an instruction execution unit.
 23. The method in claim 12, wherein said execution result source units further include a register rename unit.
 24. The method in claim 23, wherein said register rename unit includes a condition code register rename unit and wherein said execution result data includes renamed condition code data.
 25. The method in claim 12, wherein said execution result source units comprise an integer execution unit, a floating-point execution unit, an address generation unit, and a condition code register rename unit.
 26. The method in claim 12, wherein said result data includes condition code data and address data.
 27. The method in claim 12, wherein said condition code type signals comprise a condition-code type signal from said condition code rename unit generated at the time said instruction issued, and a condition-code type signal earlier generated during instruction issue and then subsequently stored in a watchpoint storage element.
 28. The method in claim 27, wherein said condition-code type signal is selected from the group consisting of a BR₋₋ XCC signal, a BR₋₋ ICC signal, a BR₋₋ FCC signal and combinations thereof.
 29. The method in claim 27, wherein said condition-code type signal is selected from the group consisting of a WP₋₋ XCC signal, a WP₋₋ ICC signal, a WP₋₋ FCC signal, and combinations thereof.
 30. The method in claim 12, wherein:said enable control signal is selected from the group consisting of a DO₋₋ PREDICT₋₋ VEC or WP₋₋ ACTIVE; said result data type signal is selected from the group consisting of a BR₋₋ XCC signal, BR₋₋ ICC signal, BR₋₋ FCC signal, WP₋₋ XCC signal, WP₋₋ ICC signal, and WP₋₋ FCC signal; said select source signal is selected from the group consisting of a CC₋₋ DV₋₋ C, FXU₋₋ CC₋₋ CURR₋₋ MATCH, FXU₋₋ CC₋₋ ARRAY₋₋ MATCH, FXAGU₋₋ CC₋₋ CURR₋₋ MATCH, FXAGU CC ARRAY₋₋ MATCH, FPU CC CURR₋₋ MATCH, and FPU CC ARRAY₋₋ MATCH; said generated source selection signal is selected from the group consisting of a SEL₋₋ BR₋₋ XCC, SEL₋₋ BR₋₋ ICC, SEL₋₋ FXU₋₋ XCC, SEL₋₋ FXU₋₋ ICC, SEL₋₋ FXAGU₋₋ XCC, SEL₋₋ FXAGU₋₋ ICC, SEL₋₋ FPU₋₋ FCC to select a source signal selected from the group consisting of XCC₋₋ DATA₋₋ C, FXU₋₋ DATA₋₋ C or ICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ C, FXU₋₋ XCC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F, FXAGU₋₋ CC DATA₋₋ F, FXAGU₋₋ CC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F, and FPU₋₋ CC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F signal; said grabbed execution result data is selected from the group consisting of XCC₋₋ DATA₋₋ C, FXU₋₋ DATA₋₋ C or ICC₋₋ DATA₋₋ C, FXU₋₋ XCC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F, FXAGU₋₋ CC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F, FXAGU₋₋ CC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F, FPU₋₋ CC₋₋ DATA₋₋ F data signal; and said grabbed execution result data for evaluation includes a EVAL₋₋ CC signal.
 31. The method in claim 12, wherein said data store unit is a latch.
 32. The method in claim 12, wherein said plurality of execution result source units comprises an integer execution unit, an address generation unit, a floating-point execution unit, and a Condition-Code rename unit.
 33. The method in claim 12, wherein said enable control signal comprises a DO₋₋ PREDICT₋₋ VEC signal; said enable control signal comprises a WP₋₋ ACTIVE signal; and said execution result data type signal comprises a condition code type signal.
 34. In a central processing unit having an instruction issue unit for issuing instructions, an execution unit for executing an instruction, and a plurality of data forward busses for communicating execution results to other components of said central processing unit, a method for grabbing condition code tags from said data forward bus for condition code tags that have not been modified by renaming in the current CPU clock cycle; said method comprising the steps of:receiving a renamed condition code physical register tag signal which identifies a renamed-condition code physical register tag but excluding condition code tag modifications occurring in the current machine cycle; receiving a plurality of condition code tag signals directly from said data forward busses; simultaneously comparing said received renamed condition code tag signal with every one of said plurality of condition code tag signals arriving from said execution units and generating a comparison signal corresponding to each of said arriving data forward buss condition code tag signals; receiving a data valid signal from each execution units ending valid data over said data forward busses during the current CPU cycle; simultaneously logically ANDing each said comparison signal with a different data valid control signal arriving from each execution unit sending valid data over said data forward busses during the current CPU cycle; and generating a condition code current match signal when each said comparison signal and each said data valid signal are asserted. said condition code current match signal identifying which of said watchpoint numbers and thereby identifying the associated instruction number and condition code tag that can be grabbed from said data forward busses in the current CPU cycle; whereby said current match logic is able to simultaneously monitor a plurality of unresolved speculatively issued instructions and identify condition codes which can be grabbed and made available for evaluation of the prediction on the basis of which said speculatively issued instructions were issued.
 35. In a central processing unit having an instruction issue unit for issuing instructions, an execution unit for executing an instruction, a register rename unit for renaming logical and physical, and a plurality of data forward busses for communicating execution results from said execution unit to other components of said central processing unit; a method for grabbing condition code tags from said data forward bus for condition code tags that have been modified by renaming in the current CPU clock cycle, said method comprising the steps of:providing a condition code tag array data store having a plurality of condition code tag register elements for storing data within said CPU; receiving a renamed condition code physical register tag signal that identifies a renamed condition code physical register tag including condition code modifications occurring in the current machine cycle; receiving a do-prediction signal including a signal watchpoint number signal component identifying a watchpoint number and a corresponding condition code tag register element allocated to each speculatively issued instruction issued during that CPU cycle; receiving a condition code renamed signal when a condition code is modified by an instruction issued in the then current CPU cycle and using said condition code renamed signal as a write enable signal for writing said renamed condition code physical register tag signal into the condition code tag register element identified by said do-prediction signal; combining by logically ANDing said condition code renamed signal and said do-prediction signal and generating a write control enable signal to control writing and the location with said array of said writing of said received renamed condition code physical register tag to said tag array only when both said condition code renamed signal and said do-prediction are asserted; storing said received renamed condition code physical register tag signal associated with said speculatively issued instruction in one of said plurality of condition code tag register elements in said tag array under control of said write enable signal wherein a particular element in said array is identified and indexed by a watchpoint number included as a component of said do-prediction signal; retaining each said stored renamed condition code physical register tag signal in said condition code tag register until said renamed condition code physical register tag is no longer needed to match a condition cede tag signal arriving over said data forward busses; simultaneously receiving a plurality of condition code tag signal from said data forward busses during the same CPU cycle; simultaneously comparing each of said received data forward bus condition code signals with every one of said stored renamed condition code physical register tag signal to generate a plurality of array comparison signals; and Logically ANDing said army comparisons signals with said data valid signals and generating a condition 10 code array match signal when said comparison signal and said data valid signal are both asserted; said condition code array match signal identifying which of said watch point numbers and thereby identifying the associated instruction number and condition code tag that can be grabbed from said data forward busses in the current cycle; whereby said array late match logic is able to simultaneously monitor a plurality of unresolved speculatively issued instructions and identify condition codes which can be grabbed and made available for evaluation of the prediction on the basis of which said speculatively issued instructions were issued.
 36. The method in claim 12, further comprising the steps of:receiving a renamed condition code physical register tag signal which identifies a renamed-condition code physical register tag but excluding condition code tag modifications occurring in the current machine cycle; receiving a plurality of condition code tag signals directly from said data forward busses; simultaneously comparing said received renamed condition code tag signal with every one of said plurality of condition code tag signals arriving from said execution units and generating a comparison signal corresponding to each of said arriving data forward buss condition code tag signals; receiving a data valid signal from each execution unit sending valid data over said data forward busses during the current CPU cycle; simultaneously Logically ANDing each said comparison signal with a different data valid control signal arriving from each execution unit sending valid data over said data forward busses during the current CPU cycle; and generating a condition code current match signal when each said comparison signal and each said data valid signal are asserted. said condition code current match signal identifying which of said watch point numbers and thereby identifying the associated instruction number and condition code tag that can be grabbed from said data forward busses in the current CPU cycle; whereby said current match logic is able to simultaneously monitor a plurality of unresolved speculatively issued instructions and identify condition codes which can be grabbed and made available for evaluation of the prediction on the basis of which said speculatively issued instructions were issued.
 37. The method of claim 36, further comprising the steps of:providing a condition code tag array data store having a plurality of condition code tag register elements for storing data within said CPU; receiving a renamed condition code physical register tag signal that identifies a renamed condition code physical register tag including condition code modifications occurring in the current machine cycle; receiving a do-prediction signal including a signal watchpoint number signal component identifying a watchpoint number and a corresponding condition code tag register element allocated to each speculatively issued instruction issued during that CPU cycle; receiving a condition code renamed signal when a condition code is modified by an instruction issued in the then current CPU cycle and using said condition code renamed signal as a write enable signal for writing said renamed condition code physical register tag signal into the condition code tag register element identified by said do-prediction signal; combining by logically ANDing said condition code renamed signal and said do-prediction signal and generating a write control enable signal to control writing and the location with said array of said writing of said received renamed condition code physical register tag to said tag array only when both said condition code renamed signal and said do-prediction are asserted; storing said received renamed condition code physical register tag signal associated with said speculatively issued instruction in one of said plurality of condition code tag register elements in said tag array under control of said write enable signal wherein a particular element in said array is identified and indexed by a watchpoint number included as a component of said do-prediction signal; retaining each said stored renamed condition code physical register tag signal in said condition code tag register until said renamed condition code physical register tag is no longer needed to match a condition code tag signal arriving over said data forward busses; simultaneously receiving a plurality of condition code tag signal from said data forward busses during the same CPU cycle; simultaneously comparing each of said received data forward bus condition code signals with every one of said stored renamed condition code physical register tag signal to generate a plurality of array comparison signals; and logically ANDing said array comparisons signals with said data valid signals and generating a condition code array match signal when said comparison signal and said data valid signal are both asserted; said condition code array match signal identifying which of said watchpoint numbers and thereby identifying the associated instruction number and condition code tag that can be grabbed from said data forward busses in the current cycle; whereby said array late match logic is able to simultaneously monitor a plurality of unresolved speculatively issued instructions and identify condition codes which can be grabbed and made available for evaluation of the prediction on the basis of which said speculatively issued instructions were issued.
 38. The method in claim 37, further comprising comparing said data forward bus tags with said condition-code data to reduce comparison time including the steps of:separating data forward bus tag comparisons between a currently renamed condition-code tag in the current issue window cycle and a condition-code tag in previous cycle by comparing the currently renamed condition-code tag in the current issue window signal to each data forward bus tag; and comparing previous cycle condition-code tag with each data forward bus tag; whereby said comparisons of said data forward bus tags with said condition code tags in the previous cycle and currently renamed condition code tags in the current issue window are performed more rapidly than if said comparisons were performed in a single non-split operation.
 39. In a central processing unit (CPU) having an issue unit for issuing instructions, an execution unit for executing instructions, and means for communicating execution results from said execution units to other units within said central processing unit, a method for simultaneously monitoring the execution results of a plurality of speculatively issued instructions; said method comprising the steps of:identifying each issued instruction with an instruction identification tag; storing prediction data within said CPU in an indexed data store associated with said instruction identfication tag during instruction issue for each speculatively issued instruction and associating said prediction data with said speculatively issue instruction, said prediction data identifying the predicted value of a condition on which the instruction was speculatively issued; simultaneously monitoring execution result signals for all issued instructions transmitted over said means for communicating execution results; simultaneously grabbing selected ones of said execution result data including known data corresponding to but not necessarily equal to said prediction data when said execution result data appears on said means for communicating; said known data identifying the actual value of a condition assumed for the purpose of speculatively issuing said instruction; comparing said predicted data with said known data and generating a misprediction signal if said predicted data does not match said known data; and recovering said central processing unit to an earlier central processing unit state in response to receipt of a misprediction signal so that instructions executed on the basis of said misprediction are undone.
 40. In a central processing unit, a method for simultaneously generating a plurality of misprediction signals for predetermined speculatively issued instructions including speculatively issued predicted branch instructions; said method comprising the steps of:receiving a watchpoint active signal indicating that a watchpoint is being formed for monitoring said speculatively issued instructions; allocating a watchpoint number and an associated watchpoint register in data storage structure defined within said CPU for each one of said speculatively issued instructions; receiving watchpoint data pertaining to said one speculatively issued instruction and storing said watchpoint data in said allocated watchpoint register; for each branch instruction issued, simultaneously generating a plurality of misprediction signals for branch instructions including the steps of: receiving an evaluation condition code signal from a condition code select logic circuit; receiving a watchpoint condition signal from a watchpoint storage element; receiving a condition code type control signal from a watchpoint storage element; receiving an enable control signal from each execution result source units; comparing said evaluation condition code signal with said watchpoint condition signal according to predetermined condition code evaluation rules including an asserted state of said enable control signal for each said execution result source unit to evaluate whether the condition for the branch was correctly predicted; if said branch instruction was correctly predicted, then asserting a branch true signal; and generating an evaluation true signal in response to a determination that said branch true signal is asserted; generating an evaluation ready signal in response to receipt of at least one data grab enable signal as a result of grabbing said result data for a speculatively issued branch instruction; and generating an instruction misprediction signal in response to receipt of both said evaluation ready signal and said evaluation true signal.
 41. In a central processing unit, a method for simultaneously generating a plurality of misprediction signals for predetermined speculatively issued instructions including speculatively issued jump-and-link instructions; said method comprising the steps of:receiving a watchpoint active signal indicating that a watchpoint is being formed for monitoring said speculatively issued instructions; allocating a watchpoint number and an assorted watchpoint register in data storage structure defined within said CPU for each one of said speculatively issued instructions; receiving a watchpoint jump-and-link enable signal indicating that the watchpoint is being formed for a jump-and-link instruction; receiving watchpoint data pertaining to said one speculatively issued instruction and storing said watchpoint data in said allocated watchpoint register; for each said jump₋₋ and₋₋ link instruction issued, simultaneously generating a plurality of jump-and-link misprediction signals including the steps of: defining a target address data structure having a plurality of storage locations for storing program counter data; writing an altemative next program counter to one of said target address data structure storage locations when said jump-and-link instruction is issued and associating said stored alternative next program counter with said instruction; computing a computed next program counter value during execution of said jump-and-link instruction in a execution result source unit; generating a jump-and-link instruction execution completion signal upon completion of execution of said jump-and-link instruction; receiving said computed next program counter from said execution result source unit; reading said stored alternative next program counter associated with said jump-and-link instruction from said storage location; comparing said alternative next program counter value with said computed next program counter value; generating a jump-and-link match signal when said alternative next program counter value matches said computed next program counter value; and generating a jump-and-link true signal in response to assertion of both said jump-and-link match signal and said watchpoint jump-and-link enable signal; and generating an evaluation true signal in response to a determination that said jump-and-link match signal is asserted; generating a jump-and-link instruction evaluation enable signal in response to assertion of said watchpoint active signal, said instruction watch point number signal, said watchpoint active signal, and said jump-and-link instruction execution completion signal; generating an evaluation ready signal in response to receipt of receipt of said jump-and-link instruction evaluation enable signal; and generating an instruction misprediction signal in response to receipt of said evaluation ready signal and said evaluation true signal.
 42. In a central processing unit, a method for simultaneously generating a plurality of misprediction signals for predetermined speculatively issued instructions including speculatively issued predicted branch instructions and jump-and-link instructions; said method comprising the steps of:receiving a watchpoint active signal indicating that a watchpoint is being formed for monitoring said speculatively issued instructions; allocating a watchpoint number and an associated watchpoint register in data storage structure defined within said CPU for each one of said speculatively issued instructions; receiving a watchpoint jump-and-link enable signal indicating that the watch point is being formed for a jump-and-link instruction; receiving watchpoint data pertaining to said one speculatively issued instruction and storing said watchpoint data in said allocated watchpoint register; for each branch instruction issued, simultaneously generating a plurality of misprediction signals for branch instructions including the steps of: receiving an evaluation condition code signal from a condition code select logic circuit; receiving a watchpoint condition signal from a watchpoint storage element; receiving a condition code type control signal from a watchpoint storage element; receiving an enable control signal from each execution result source units; comparing said evaluation condition code signal with said watchpoint condition signal according to predetermined condition code evaluation rules including an asserted state of said enable control signal for each said execution result source unit to evaluate whether the condition for the branch was correctly predicted; if said branch instruction was correctly predicted, then assembling a branch true signal; and generating an evaluation true signal in response to a determination that said branch true signal is asserted; and for each said jump-and-link instruction issued, simultaneously generating a plurality of jump-and-link misprediction signals including the steps of: defining a target address data structure having a plurality of storage locations for storing program counter data; writing an alternative next program counter to one of said target address data structure storage locations when said jump-and-link instruction is issued and associating said stored alternative next program counter with said instruction; computing a computed next program counter value during execution of said jump-and-link instruction in a execution result source unit; generating a jump-and-link instruction execution completion signal upon completion of execution of said jump-and-link instruction; receiving said computed next program counter from said execution result source unit; reading said stored alternative next program counter associated with said jump-and-link instruction from said storage location; comparing said alternative next program counter value with said computed next program counter value; generating a jump-and-link match signal when said alternative next program counter value matches said computed next program counter value; generating a jump-and-link true signal in response to assertion of both said jump-and-link match signal and said watchpoint jump-and-link enable signal; generating an evaluation true signal in response to a determination that said jump-and-link match signal is asserted; and generating a jump-and-link instruction evaluation enable signal in response to assertion of said watchpoint active signal, said instruction watchpoint number signal, said watchpoint active signal, and said jump-and-link instruction execution completion signal; generating an evaluation ready signal in response to receipt of either at least one data grab enable signal as a result of grabbing said result data for a speculatively issued branch instruction or receipt of said jump-and-link instruction evaluation enable signal; and generating an instruction misprediction signal in response to receipt of both said evaluation ready signal and said evaluation true signal.
 43. The method of claim 42, further comprising the steps of:receiving an enable control signal from each execution result source unit; receiving a result data type signal from each execution result source unit; receiving a select source signal indicating from which of said execution result source units said result data will be received and an indication of a time relative to the current clock cycle that said result data is expected; generating a source selection signal in response to receipt of said enable control signal, said result data type signal, and said select source signal according to predetermined rules; monitoring execution result data signals from said execution result source units; grabbing execution result data from said selected source in response to said arriving execution result data and said source selection signal; and storing said grabbed execution result data for evaluation in a data store within said processor; whereby result data for which predetermined instructions are waiting are simultaneously grabbed from a plurality of execution result source units.
 44. The method in claim 42, wherein said execution result source units include an instruction execution unit and a register rename unit.
 45. The method in claim 42, wherein:said predetermined speculatively issued instructions are selected from the group consisting of control transfer instructions, branch instructions, jump-and-link instructions, and combinations thereof; said condition code type control signal includes selected from the group consisting of WP₋₋ XCC, WP₋₋ ICC, WP₋₋ FCC, and combinations thereof; said branch true signal comprises a BR₋₋ TRUE signal; said evaluation condition cede signal comprises a EVAL₋₋ CC signal; said watch point condition signal comprises a WP₋₋ COND signal; said enable signal includes a WP₋₋ JMPL signal and said first state is WP₋₋ JMPL=0 and said second state is WP₋₋ JMPL=1; said source selection signal includes selected from the group consisting of a SEL₋₋ BR₋₋ XCC, SEL₋₋ BR₋₋ ICC, SEL₋₋ FXU₋₋ XCC, SEL₋₋ FXU₋₋ ICC, SEL₋₋ FXAGU₋₋ XCC, SEL₋₋ FXAGU₋₋ ICC, and SEL₋₋ FPU₋₋ FCC signal; said jump-and-link instruction execution completion signal includes a FXAGU₋₋ JMPL signal; said jump-and-link instruction checkpoint number signal includes a FXAGU₋₋ CHKPNT₋₋ DEC signal; said jump-and-link match signal includes a JMPL₋₋ MATCH signal; said jump-and-link true signal includes a JMPL₋₋ TRUE signal; said watchpoint jump-and-link signal includes a WP₋₋ JMPL signal; said evaluation true signal includes an EVAL₋₋ TRUE signal; said evaluation ready signal includes an EVAL₋₋ READY signal; said evaluation enable signal includes an EVAL₋₋ ENABLE signal; said watch point active signal includes a WP₋₋ ACTIVE₋₋ VEC signal; said watchpoint jump-and-link enable signal includes a WP₋₋ JMPL signal; and said instruction misprediction signal includes a WP₋₋ MISPRED₋₋ VEC signal.
 46. In a central processing unit having an instruction issue unit and a plurality of instruction execution units, a method for simultaneously generating a plurality of misprediction signals for predetermined speculatively issued instructions including speculatively issued predicted branch instructions and jump-and-link instructions; said method comprising the steps of:predicting a condition resulting from execution of an instruction sequence; speculatively issuing a control transfer instruction based on said predicted condition prior to completing execution of said execution sequence; allocating a watchpoint storage register within a data structure of said CPU and associating said allocated register with a particular one of said speculatively issued instructions; storing said predicted condition in said allocated watchpoint register for later comparison with an evaluated condition on which the correct direction for said control transfer instruction depends; and for each speculatively instruction issued: monitoring execution result data generated by said execution units, comparing said pre-execution prediction information stored in each said watch point register with post-execution evaluated condition information received from said execution units to determine if said predicted condition information matches said evaluated condition information for said instruction sequence; and generating a misprediction indication for each speculatively issued instruction that was wrongly issued as a result of mispredicted condition information when said prediction information for said instruction does not match said known information for said instruction.
 47. In a central processing unit having an instruction issue unit, an instruction execution unit, and a memory storage unit for storing data, a method for concurrently storing an alternate branch address and a predicted jump-and-link address in a common data structure within a single shared storage unit within said central processing unit; said method comprising the steps of:generating a control-transfer-instruction issued signal from the issue unit for each control transfer instruction issued at the time it is issued, said control-transfer-instruction issued signal including a watchpoint instruction type signal to identify the control transfer instruction as a branch instruction or as a jump-and-link instruction; determining the alternative next program counter during instruction decode of a predicted branch and a jump-and-link instruction; generating a watchpoint write enable control signal and watchpoint write address signal identifying a register location within said storage unit for storing an alternate branch address; said watchpoint write enable control signal being asserted when making a checkpoint and a watchpoint; writing said watchpoint alternative next program counter into said storage unit at the register location indicated by said watchpoint write address; said watchpoint alternative next program counter including the predicted target fetch program counter when said control-transfer-instruction is a jump-and-link instruction, and said watchpoint alternative next program counter including the fetch program counter for the alternative branch direction when said control-transfer-instruction is a predicted branch instruction; and storing said alternative next program counter for each said branch instruction or said jump-and-link instruction in a separate addressable storage location based on said watchpoint instruction type signal.
 48. The method in claim 47, wherein said control transfer instruction is selected from the group consisting of a branch instruction, a jump-and-link instructions, and combinations thereof;said control transfer instruction issued signal comprises a DO₋₋ WTCHPNT signal including a jump-and link signal component WP₋₋ JMPL; said alternative next program counter includes a WP₋₋ ANPC signal; said checkpoint write enable signal includes a MAKE₋₋ CHKPNT signal; said checkpoint write address signal includes a NEXT₋₋ CHKPNT signal; said storage location within said data structure is located within a TARGET₋₋ RAM; and said information item for said branch instruction further comprising: a branch type field designating the instruction as a branch that depends on XCC, as a branch that depends on ICC, as a branch that depends on FCC, or as a jump-link instruction; a COND field; and a condition code tag field.
 49. The method of claim 47, further comprising the step of:receiving an enable control signal from each execution result source unit; receiving a result data type signal from each execution result source unit; receiving a select source signal indicating from which of said execution result source units said result data will be received and an indication of a time relative to the current clock cycle that said result data is expected; generating a source selection signal in response to receipt of said enable control signal, said result data type signal, and said select source signal according to predetermined rules; monitoring execution result data signals from said execution result source units; grabbing execution result data from said selected source in response to said arriving execution result data and said source selection signal; and storing said grabbed execution result data for evaluation in a data store within said processor; whereby result data for which predetermined instructions are waiting are simultaneously grabbed from a plurality of execution result source units.
 50. The method of claim 47, further comprising the step of sending the correct re-fetch instruction address for instruction re-fetch after a misprediction of speculatively issued instruction occurs; said step of sending including the steps of:simultaneously storing, for each speculatively issued predicted instruction prior to execution of said instruction, an alternative path program instruction address designating the alternative execution path for said predicted instruction and a prediction information on which said predicted execution depends in a watchpoint element in a target address data structure defined in a memory unit within said CPU; simultaneously generating, upon completing execution of each said predicted instruction, signals indicating instruction execution completion status, identifying a watchpoint element number corresponding to said instruction in which pre-execution alternative path and prediction information is stored, and a calculated correct condition data value for comparing with said stored condition value and alternative program instruction address; simultaneously evaluating the prediction for each single instruction including by comparing said stored pre-execution alternative path and prediction information with said generated calculated condition data value for each said instruction and generating a match signal if the predicted condition data match said calculated correct condition data value for any of said instructions and including evaluating if a branch instruction or a jump-and-link instruction was correctly or incorrectly predicted and generating a mispredicted signal for each mispredicted instruction; prioritizing recovery of said CPU from said misprediction and selecting a particular high priority misprediction based on predetermined priority rules; identifying a checkpoint associated with said particular high priority mispredicted instruction and generating a CPU backup signal for recovering said processor from said particular mispredicted instruction; reading the alternative next program counter for said particular mispredicted instruction from said target address data structure; and sending said read alternative next program address to an issue unit for restarting execution of said CPU based on said re-fetched instruction.
 51. In a central processing unit having an instruction issue unit including an instruction fetch component, an instruction execution unit, an a data storage unit, a method for sending the correct fetch address for instruction fetch after a misprediction of a speculatively issued instruction occurs; said method comprising the steps of:simultaneously storing, for each speculatively issued predicted instruction prior to execution of said instruction, an alternative path program instruction address designating an alternative execution path for said predicted instruction and a prediction information on which said predicted execution depends in a watchpoint element in a target address data structure defined in a memory unit within said CPU; simultaneously generating, upon completing execution of each said predicted instruction, signals indicating instruction execution completion status, identifying a watchpoint element number corresponding to said instruction in which pre-execution alternative path information and prediction information is stored, and a calculated correct condition data value for comparing with said stored condition value and alternative program instruction address; simultaneously evaluating said stored prediction information for each said speculatively issued instruction including by comparing said stored pre-execution alternative path and prediction information with said generated calculated condition data value for each said speculatively issued instruction and generating a match signal if the predicted condition data match said calculated correct condition data value for any of said instructions and including evaluating if a branch instruction or a jump-and-link instruction was correctly or incorrectly predicted and generating a mispredicted signal for each mispredicted instruction; selecting one mispredicted instructions from among all mispredicted instructions; identifying a watchpoint associated with said selected mispredicted instruction; reading the alternative next program counter address for said selected mispredicted instruction from said target address data structure by indexing into said data structure with said selected watchpoint number; and sending said read alternative next program counter address to said instruction issue unit for instruction re-fetch to initiate CPU execution along the desired instruction sequence path.
 52. The method of claim 51, wherein said step of selecting one mispredicted instructions composes the step of prioritizing mispredictions occurring in said CPU and selecting a high priority misprediction based on predetermined priority rules.
 53. The method in claim 51, wherein said speculatively issued instruction is selected from the group consisting of a predicted control transfer instruction, a predicted branch instruction, a jump-and-link instruction, and combinations thereof.
 54. The method in claim 51, wherein said steps of simultaneous store, simultaneous generate, and simultaneous evaluate comprise respectively the steps of store, generate, and evaluate within the same CPU clock cycle.
 55. In a central processing unit having an instruction issue unit including an instruction fetch component, an instruction execution unit, an a data storage unit, a method for sending the correct fetch address for instruction fetch after a misprediction of a speculatively issued instruction occurs; said method comprising the steps of:storing, in response to issuing a predicted branch instruction, a watchpoint alternative program counter data in a watchpoint element associated with said branch instruction in a data structure of a memory unit within said CPU, wherein said watchpoint alternative program counter data is the next address of the branch if the prediction is taken is the branch-target address if the prediction is not taken; storing, in response to issuing a predicted jump-and-link instruction, a predicted jump-and-link target address in a watchpoint element associated with said jump-and-link instruction in a data structure of a memory unit within said CPU; asserting a watchpoint valid signal for each branch and jump-and-link instruction is issued to allocate a watchpoint element to said issued instruction; asserting, in response to said assertion of said watchpoint valid signal, a watchpoint active vector signal to indicate that a predicted instruction which uses a checkpoint number identified in said watchpoint active vector signal is issued and is not yet resolved; for each jump-and-link instruction, completing execution of said jump-and-link including calculating the correct jump-and-link target address, asserting an address generation unit jump-and-link instruction completion signal when the address generation unit finishes execution of jump-and-link instruction, generating an address generation unit jump-and-link checkpoint identification signal that designates the checkpoint number of the jump-and-link instruction, and generating an address generation unit jump-and-link data signal that designates the calculated correct jump-and-link instruction target address; for each predicted branch instruction, completing execution of said branch instruction including calculating the condition code value on which the branch direction depends, and in response to receipt of said evaluation ready signal, grabbing the evaluate condition code signal corresponding to the watchpoint number when said evaluate condition code signal becomes available; evaluating the prediction for each single instruction in an evaluation logic unit including the steps of: determining if a jump-and-link instruction was correctly predicted by:reading the predicted jump-and-link address in the storage location in said target address memory unit indexed by said address generation unit jump-and-link checkpoint identification signal; comparing said predicted jump-and-link address with said computed jump-and-link address and generating a compare result; generating a jump-and-link match signal if the predicted address and the calculated correct address are the same; comparing said jump-and-link match signal with said watchpoint jump-and-link enable signal stored in said watchpoint element; and generating a jump-and-link true output signal if said signals match indicating that said watchpoint was formed for a jump-and link instruction and the jump-and-link instruction was properly predicted; determining if a branch instruction was correctly predicted by: receiving a condition code evaluation signal from a condition code select logic unit; reading watchpoint data stored in a watchpoint register including a watchpoint condition signal stored in the watchpoint storage element associated with the instruction; comparing said evaluate condition code signal with said watchpoint condition data stored in the watchpoint element corresponding to said branch instruction based on predetermined rules to evaluate if the prediction made when issuing the branch is correct; and generating a branch true signal for said particular watchpoint if said condition code evaluation signal and said watchpoint condition signal; and logically ORing said branch true signal and the jump-and-link true signal and generating an evaluation true signal if either said branch true or jump-and-link signals are asserted as true; said watchpoint allocation to either a branch instruction or to a jump-and-link instruction but not both limiting concurrent assertion of said branch true signal and said jump-and-link signal for the same watchpoint element; generating an evaluation ready signal after said jump-and-link instruction completion signal is asserted for each instruction during a CPU cycle; if any of said evaluation true signals are asserted indicating that a misprediction has been detected, then generating an instruction watchpoint mispredicted signal detecting a misprediction from said evaluation true signals generated from each of the plurality of evaluation true logic units and communicating said misprediction signal to a precise state unit for maintaining precise state within said CPU; prioritizing all watchpoint mispredicted signals generated and identifying one of said mispredictions for CPU recovery according to predetermined prioritization rules; generating, in the previous state unit, a backup checkpoint signal identifying the checkpointed instruction to which the CPU will be backed up to in order to recover from the misprediction due to either a mispredicted branch instruction or a mispredicted jump-and-link instruction; generating, in the precise state unit, a jump-and-link mispredict signal only when the backup is due to a mispredicted jump-and-link instruction; choosing a location within said memory store based on factors including said identified misprediction, the type of misprediction, and the watchpoint/checkpoint number; said choosing including the steps of:generating a processor backup initiation signal in said precise state unit in response to receipt of a watchpoint mispredicted signal; receiving a processor backup initiation signal that indicates a misprediction has occurred in the CPU and that the CPU is to be backed up to an earlier state including resetting the program counter to an alternative program counter value; receiving a backup checkpoint signal that provides an index identifying a checkpoint/watchpoint number into said memory storage region and using said index to read the contents of the location storing the correct branch address or correct jump-and-link address for instruction fetch; receiving an address generation unit checkpoint signal that provides an index in the form of a watchpoint and checkpoint number into said memory storage region and using said index to read the contents of the location storing the alternative next program counter; receiving a make-backup control signal from said precise state unit when a CPU backup is required in response to detection of a misprediction; receiving an address generation unit jump-and-link instruction completion signal when the address generation unit finishes execution of a jump-and-link instruction; applying said jump-and-link completion signal and said make-backup signal as a control selector input signals to a multiplexer to select one of said backup checkpoint from said precise state unit or said address generation unit checkpoint input signals as a read-address index specifying a particular watchpoint element within said memory storage region; selecting the memory storage location address to read based on whether the mispredicted instruction is a branch instruction of a jump-and-link instruction as indicated by said make-backup and jump-and-link control signals; and choosing an alternative next program counter for fetching a new instruction to recover from said misprediction, said choosing comprising the steps of:generating a jump-and-link misprediction signal when said misprediction is a jump-and-link instruction misprediction; applying said misprediction signal to a multiplexer having a multiplexer selection control signal, a plurality of multiplexer input signals, and one multiplexer output for the input signal selected by said control signal; selecting a first multiplexer input signal containing the alternative next program counter stored in said storage location within said data structure in said data store as the multiplexer output signal when said multiplexer selection control signal has a first state indicating that the misprediction is a mispredicted branch instruction; selecting a second multiplexer input signal containing the computed jump-and-link address as the multiplexer output signal when said multiplexer selection control signal has a second state indicating that the misprediction has occurred and the misprediction is a mispredicted jump-and-link instruction; and restarting execution of said CPU including the steps of:generating a read alternative program counter address signal containing the predicted target fetch program counter for a jump-and-link instruction or the fetch program counter for the alternative branch direction for a predicted branch instruction; and sending said read alternative program address signal in said selected multiplexer output to the instruction fetch unit so that the fetch unit can re-fetch instructions from the correct address.
 56. The method in claim 55, wherein:said re-fetch address is selected from the group consisting of a branch instruction address and a jump-and-link instruction address; said jump-and-link instruction completion signal comprises a FXAGU₋₋ JMPL signal; said checkpoint identification signal comprises a FXAGU₋₋ CHKPNT signal; said address generation unit data signal comprises a FXAGU₋₋ DATA signal; said jump-and-link match signal comprises a JMPL₋₋ MATCH signal said watchpoint jump-and-link enable signal comprises a WP₋₋ JMPL signal; said jump-and-link true comprises a JMPL₋₋ TRUE signal; said condition code evaluation signal comprises a EVAL₋₋ CC signal; said watchpoint data comprises WP₋₋ COND, WP₋₋ XCC, WP₋₋ ICC, and WP₋₋ FCC data signals; said watchpoint condition signal comprises a WP₋₋ COND signal; said branch true signal comprises a BR₋₋ TRUE signal; said evaluation true signal comprises a EVAL₋₋ TRUE signal; said evaluation ready signal comprises a EVAL₋₋ READY signal; said watchpoint active signal comprises a WP₋₋ ACTIVE₋₋ VEC signal; said watchpoint misprediction signal comprises a WP₋₋ MISPRED₋₋ VEC signal; said backup checkpoint signal comprises a BACKUP₋₋ CHKPNT signal; said jump-and-link mispredict signal comprises a MISPRED signal; said processor backup initiation signal comprises a DO₋₋ BACKUP signal; said backup checkpoint comprises a BACKUP₋₋ CHKPNT signal; said make-backup control signal comprises a MAKE₋₋ BACKUP signal; said address generation unit jump-and-link instruction completion signal comprises a FXAGU₋₋ JMPL signal; said selected backup checkpoint signal comprises a BACKUP₋₋ CHKPNT signal; said address generation said unit checkpoint comprises a FXAGU₋₋ CHKPNT signal; said jump-and-link misprediction signal comprises a MISPRED signal; said alternative next program counter comprises a WR₋₋ ANPC signal; said computed jump-and-link address comprises a FXAGU₋₋ DATA signal; said alternative program counter address comprises a RD₋₋ ANPC signal; and said step of comparing said jump-and-link match signal with said watchpoint jump-and-link enable signal comprises boolean logically ANDing said signals.
 57. A method as in claim 55, further comprising the steps of:asserting an instruction kill signal in response to identification of a misprediction during recovery from said misprediction to kill checkpoints for instructions occurring sequentially after the instruction at the backup point; in response to said assertion of said kill signal, deactivating the watchpoint element corresponding to each killed instruction by suppressing generation of watchpoint active signals and watchpoint mispredicted signals.
 58. A method as in claim 55, wherein said watchpoint active vector signal and the watchpoint mispredicted signal are each separately encoded as a multi-hot vectors each having a number of vector bit positions corresponding to the number allocatable checkpoints within said CPU so that watchpoint active information for each watchpoint can be simultaneously stored and communicated in the same signal.
 59. A method for comparing data forward bus tags with condition-code data to reduce comparison time; said method comprising the steps of:separating data forward bus tag comparisons between a currently renamed condition-code tag in the current issue window cycle and a condition-code tag in previous cycle by the steps of: comparing the currently renamed condition-code tag in the current issue window signal to each data forward bus tag; and comparing previous cycle condition-code tag with each data forward bus tag; whereby said comparisons of said data forward bus tags with said condition code tags in the previous cycle and currently renamed condition code tags in the current issue window are performed more rapidly than if said comparisons were performed in a single non-split operation.
 60. A method as in claim 59, further comprising the step of:latching the currently renamed condition-code tag in the current issue window signal in a latch circuit before making said comparison of the currently renamed condition-code; and wherein said step of comparing the currently renamed Condition-code tag in the current issue window cycle to each data forward bus tag comprises a comparison of said latched signal to each data forward bus tag thereby eliminating timing critically.
 61. In a central processing unit having an instruction issue unit, a register rename unit for renaming logical and physical registers including a condition code register rename unit, a plurality of execution units, and a data forward bus for communicating execution result data from each said execution unit to other components of said central processing unit; a method for simultaneously grabbing execution result data from each of said plurality of execution units, said method comprising the steps of:for each said execution unit, comparing an early condition code register tag signal received from said condition code register rename unit identifying a condition code register that has been renamed in a previous CPU clock cycle but not identifying condition code registers that have been renamed in the current cycle with a valid execution result data signal including a condition code register tag signal component arriving from said execution unit in a current CPU clock cycle, and generating a condition code tag current-match signal for each said execution unit if said comparing operation identifies a match between said condition code register tag signal and said valid execution result data signal including said condition code register tag signal component; and for each said execution unit, comparing a plurality of late condition code register tag signals received from said condition code register rename unit in previous cycles each identifying a condition code register that has been renamed in a previous CPU clock cycle including identifying a condition code register that has been renamed in the current cycle with a valid execution result data signal including a condition code register tag signal component arriving from said execution unit in a current CPU clock cycle, and generating a current condition code tag array-late-match signal for each said execution unit identifying which of said plurality of condition code register tag signals matched if said comparing operation identifies a match between one of said condition cede register tag signals and one of said plurality of condition code register tag signal components.
 62. The method in claim 61, wherein:said early condition code register tag signal comprises a CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ C signal; said condition code register rename unit comprises a FSR/CCRFRN unit; said valid execution result data signal is selected from the group consisting of a FXU₋₋ XICC₋₋ TAG₋₋ F signal, a FXAGU₋₋ XICC₋₋ TAG₋₋ F signal, and a FPU₋₋ FCC₋₋ TAG₋₋ F signal; said execution units are selected from the group consisting of a fixed point execution unit, a fixed point/address generation unit, and a floating point unit, and said condition code tag current-match signal is selected from the group consisting of a FXU₋₋ CURR₋₋ MATCH signal, a FXAGU₋₋ CURR₋₋ MATCH signal, and a FPU₋₋ CURR₋₋ MATCH signal; said plurality of late condition code register tag signals comprise a plurality of CC₋₋ TAG₋₋ RENAMED signals; said condition code register rename unit comprises a FSP/CCRFRN unit; and said current condition code tag array-late-match signals are selected from the group consisting of a FXU₋₋ ARRAY₋₋ LATE₋₋ MATCH signal, a FXAGU₋₋ ARRAY₋₋ LATE₋₋ MATCH signal, and a FPU₋₋ ARRAY₋₋ LATE₋₋ MATCH signal for each said execution unit.
 63. The method of claim 61, further comprising the steps of:providing a late condition code tag array data store comprising a plurality of addressable tag storage elements within said CPU for storing said late condition code register tags; receiving said late condition code register tag signal components from said condition code register rename unit; receiving a condition code renamed signal from said condition code register rename unit; receiving a do-prediction signal including a watchpoint number identification component signal derived from a do-watchpoint signal from said instruction issue unit; generating a tag array write enable signal for controlling the address of each write of said condition code register tag signal into said tag array data store if said condition code renamed signal and said do-prediction signals are both asserted; storing said receiving said late condition code register tag signal components into one of said of addressable tag storage elements identified by said watchpoint identification number when said tag array write enable signal is asserted; and reading each said stored condition code register tags from each said tag storage element for each said execution unit for use in said compare operation.
 64. The method of claim 63, wherein:said condition code renamed signal comprises a CC₋₋ RENAMED signal; said do-prediction signal comprises a DO₋₋ PREDICT₋₋ VEC signal and said do-watchpoint signal comprises a DO₋₋ WTCHPT signal; and said tag array write enable signal comprises a ARRAY₋₋ WRITE₋₋ VEC signal.
 65. An apparatus for simultaneously monitoring the execution results of a plurality of instructions in a central processing unit, said apparatus comprising:an issue unit for issuing instructions; an execution unit for executing instructions; a data forward distribution bus communicating execution results from said execution units to other units within said central processing unit; a watchpoint unit having a plurality of watchpoint registers for storing watchpoint data coupled to receive execution result signals from said execution unit over said data forward distribution within the processor; means for allocating a watchpoint register for storing watchpoint data for each speculatively issued predicted instruction at the time said instruction is issued; means for monitoring execution result signals transmitted over said data forward busses in said watchpoint unit; means for detecting occurrence of predetermined events based on said execution result signals and predetermined rules; means for informing other CPU units when predetermined events are detected for the predicted speculatively issued instructions; means for comparing said watchpoint data stored in said watchpoint register for a particular instruction with said result signals arriving over said data forward busses pertaining to said particular instruction to evaluate if the condition on which said particular instruction speculatively issued was correctly predicted; deallocation means for deallocating said watchpoint element and continuing execution if said evaluation indicates that said prediction was correct; means for supplying a new address to said issue unit so that the instruction corresponding to the known condition can be re-fetched and issued to correct the misprediction if said evaluation indicates that said prediction was wrong; means for backing up said central processing unit to an earlier state so that said misprediction can be undone; means for initiating execution for instructions in the correct the instruction stream based on said re-fetched instruction; and means for deallocating said watchpoint element when said execution in completed.
 66. An apparatus for simultaneously grabbing result data for which predetermined instructions are waiting from a plurality of execution result generation units within a central processing unit (CPU); said apparatus comprising:means for receiving an enable control signal from each result data source; means for receiving a result data type signal from each result data source; means for receiving a select source signal indicating from which of said execution result generation units said result data will be received and an indication of a time relative to the current clock cycle that said result data is expected; means for generating a source selection signal in response to receipt of said enable control signal, said result data type signal, and said select source signal according to predetermined rules; means for monitoring execution result data signals from said execution result generation units; means for grabbing execution result data from said selected source in response to said arriving execution result data and said source selection signal; and means for storing said grabbed execution result data for evaluation in a data store within said processor.
 67. The apparatus in claim 66, wherein said means for grabbing comprises:a first plurality of logical AND gates each including an enable control signal input port, a result data type signal input port, and a select source signal input port; a second plurality of logical OR gates coupled to selected ones of said first plurality of logical AND gates for combining selected outputs from said plurality of logical AND gates having the same result data type dependency; a third plurality of logical AND gates each having a select condition code type input port and a result data source input port coupled to selected ones of said first plurality of logical AND gates and said logical OR gates; a multi-input logical OR gate having a plurality of input ports each for receiving an output of said third plurality of logical OR gates; a latch circuit for latching the output signal of said multi-input OR gate, wherein said output signal comprises grabbed execution result data including condition code data.
 68. An apparatus for simultaneously generating a plurality of misprediction signals for predetermined instruction types including branch instructions and jump-and-link instructions in a central processing unit; said apparatus comprising:means for receiving a watchpoint jump-and-link enable signal having a first state indicating that a watchpoint is being formed for monitoring a branch instruction or a second state indicating that a watchpoint is being formed for a jump-and-link instruction; means for simultaneously generating a misprediction signal for each of a plurality of issued branch instructions including: means for receiving an evaluation condition code signal from a condition code select logic circuit;means for receiving a watchpoint condition signal from a watchpoint storage element; means for receiving a condition code type control signal from a watchpoint storage element; means for receiving an enable control signal from each execution result generation units; means for comparing said evaluation condition code signal with said watchpoint condition signal according to predetermined condition code evaluation rules including an asserted state of said enable control signal for each said execution result generation units to evaluate whether the condition for the branch was correctly predicted; means for generating a branch true signal if said branch was correctly predicte; and means for simultaneously generating a jump-and-link misprediction signal for each of a plurality of issued jump-and-link instructions including:means for defining a target data structure having a plurality of storage locations for storing program counter data; means for writing an alternative next program counter to one of said storage locations when said jump-and-link instruction is issued and associating said stored alternative next program counter with said instruction; means for computing a computed next program counter value in a execution result generation units; means for receiving said computed next program counter from said execution result generation units; means for reading said stored alternative next program counter associated with said instruction from said storage location; means for comparing said alternative next program counter with said computed next program counter according to predetermined program counter comparison rules; means for generating a jump-and-link match signal when said comparison evaluates as true; and means for generating a jump-and-link true signal in response to a true state of both said jump-and-link match signal and said watchpoint jump-and-link signal; and means for generating an evaluation true signal in response to either a determination that said jump-and-link match signal is asserted or that said branch true signal is asserted; means for generating an evaluation ready signal in response to receipt of at least one source selection signal or receipt of an evaluation enable signal, said evaluation enable signal being generated in response to assertion of a watchpoint active signal, a watchpoint jump-and-link enable signal, a jump-and-link instruction execution completion signal, and a jump-and-link instruction checkpoint number signal; and means for generating an instruction misprediction signal in response to receipt of said evaluation ready signal and said evaluation true signal.
 69. An apparatus for concurrently storing an alternate branch address and a predicted jump-and-link address in a common data structure within a single shared storage unit in a central processing unit; said apparatus comprising:means for generating a control-transfer-instruction issued signal from the issue unit for each control transfer instruction issued at the time it is issued; means for providing a watchpoint jump-and-link signal within said control-transfer-instruction issued signal to identify the instruction as a branch instruction or as a jump-and-link instruction; means for computing an alternative next program counter that specifies the target fetch program counter computed by a program control logic unit; means for generating a checkpoint write enable control signal and checkpoint write address for storing an alternate branch address in a storage location within said data structure; said write enable control signal being asserted when making a checkpoint; means for waiting the watchpoint alternative next program counter into a storage unit at the checkpoint write address; means for determining the alternative next program counter during instruction decode of a predicted branch and a jump-and-link instruction, said watchpoint alternative next program counter sent to the Watchpoint Unit for a jump-and-link instruction including the predicted target fetch program counter and said watchpoint alternative next program counter sent to the Watchpoint Unit for a predicted branch instruction including the fetch program counter for the alternative branch direction; means for decoding said control transfer instruction issued signal in a field selection and write logic unit to determine the contents of selected information fields within said signal including determining whether the issued instruction is a branch instruction or a jump-and-link instruction, a first predetermined state in said JMPL field indicating that the instruction is a jump-link instruction and a second state in said JMPL filed indicating that said instruction is a branch instruction; and means for storing an information item for each branch instruction or jump-and-link instruction in a separate addressable storage location based on said indicia present in said control transfer instruction issued signal; wherein when said instruction is a branch instruction, said information item for said branch instruction comprises an alternative next program counter; and wherein when said instruction is a jump-and-link instruction, said information item for said jump-and-link instruction comprises a predicted target address.
 70. A method for sending the correct re-fetch instruction address for instruction re-fetch after a misprediction of an issued instruction occurs; said method comprising the steps of:means for simultaneously storing, for each speculatively issued predicted instruction prior to execution of said instruction, an alternative path program instruction address designating the alternative execution path for said predicted instruction and a prediction information on which said predicted execution depends in a watchpoint element in a target address data structure defined in a memory unit within said CPU; means for simultaneously generating, upon completing execution of each said predicted instruction, signals indicating instruction execution completion status, identifying a watchpoint element number corresponding to said instruction in which pre-execution alternative path and prediction information is stored, and a calculated correct condition data value for comparing with said stored condition value and alternative program instruction address; means for simultaneously evaluating the prediction for each single instruction including by comparing said stored pre-execution alternative path and prediction information with said generated calculated condition data value for each said instruction and for evaluating if a branch instruction or a jump-and-link instruction was correctly or incorrectly predicted and generating a mispredicted signal for each mispredicted instruction; means for prioritizing recovery of said CPU from said misprediction and selecting a particular high priority misprediction based on predetermined priority rules; means for identifying a checkpoint associated with said particular high priority mispredicted instruction and generating a CPU backup signal for recovering said processor from said particular mispredicted instruction; means for reading the altemative next program counter for said particular mispredicted instruction from said target address data structure; and means for sending said read alternative next program address to an issue unit for restarting execution of said CPU based on said re-fetched instruction.
 71. The apparatus in claim 70, wherein:said means for simultaneously storing comprises a plurality of watchpoint storage elements and watchpoint read/write control logic for controlling writing to and reading from said watchpoint elements; said watchpoint elements coupled to an instruction issue unit and receiving instruction decode information for each predicted instruction; said means for simultaneously generating instruction execution completion signals comprises at least one instruction execution unit coupled a plurality of condition code grabbing units for grabbing execution result data including condition code data from data forward busses; said means for simultaneously evaluating comprises a plurality of evaluation logic units for evaluating predicted and actual condition data on which a predicted instruction depends; said means for prioritizing comprises a precise state unit for tracking instruction status including execution status and selecting said high priority misprediction from multiple mispredictions and execution faults based on predetermined rules; said means for identifying comprises a target address random access memory unit, peripheral control logic associated with said target address random access memory; a multiplexor circuit having a control input signal and a plurality of selectable signal inputs including a backup checkpoint input and a address generation unit checkpoint signal for gating either an address associated with a branch instruction or an address associated with a jump-and-link instruction out of said target address random access unit; said means for reading comprises jump-and-link match logic for comparing a pre-execution condition with an actual execution condition result; and said means for sending comprises and alternative program counter output logic including a multiplexer circuit having target address random access memory input signal and an execution result data input signal and a control signal input coupled to said precise state unit for outputting the proper instruction program counter address from among a plurality of program counter.
 72. An apparatus for comparing data forward bus tags with condition-code data to reduce comparison time in a central processing unit; said apparatus comprising:means for separating data forward bus tag comparisons between a currently renamed condition-code tag in the current issue window cycle and a condition-code tag in previous cycle by the steps of: means for comparing the currently renamed condition-code tag in the current issue window signal to each data forward bus tag; and means for comparing previous cycle condition-code tag with each data forward bus tag; whereby said comparisons of said data forward bus tags with said condition code tags in the previous cycle and currently renamed condition code tags in the current issue window are performed mere rapidly than if said comparisons were performed in a single non-split operation.
 73. An apparatus for simultaneously monitoring the execution results of a plurality of instructions in a central processing unit, said apparatus comprising:an issue unit for issuing instructions; an execution unit for executing instructions; a data forward distribution bus communicating execution results from said execution units to other units within said central processing unit; a watchpoint unit having a plurality of watchpoint registers for storing watchpoint data coupled to receive execution result signals from said execution unit over said data forward distribution within the processor; means for allocating a watchpoint register for storing watchpoint data for each speculatively issued predicted instruction at the time said instruction is issued; means for monitoring execution result signals transmitted over said data forward busses in said watchpoint unit; means for detecting occurrence of predetermined events based on said execution result signals and predetermined rules; means for informing other CPU units when predetermined events are detected for the predicted speculatively issued instructions; means for comparing said watchpoint data stored in said watchpoint register for a particular instruction with said result signals arriving over said data forward busses pertaining to said particular instruction to evaluate if the condition on which said particular instruction speculatively issued was correctly predicted; deallocation means for deallocating said watchpoint element and continuing execution if said evaluation indicates that said prediction was correct; means for supplying a new address to said issue unit so that the instruction corresponding to the known condition can be re-fetched and issued to correct the misprediction if said evaluation indicates that said prediction was wrong; means for backing up said central processing unit to an earlier state so that said misprediction can be undone; means for initiating execution for instructions in the correct the instruction stream based on said re-fetched instruction; means for deallocating said watchpoint element when said execution in completed; means for receiving an enable control signal from each result data source; means for receiving a result data type signal from each result data source; means for receiving a select source signal indicating from which of said execution result generation units said result data will be received and an indication of a time relative to the current clock cycle that said result data is expected; means for generating a source selection signal in response to receipt of said enable control signal, said result data type signal, and said select source signal according to predetermined rules; means for monitoring execution result data signals from said execution result generation units; means for grabbing execution result data from said selected source in response to said arriving execution result data and said source selection signal; means for storing said grabbed execution result data for evaluation in a data store within said processor; means for receiving a watchpoint jump-and-link enable signal having a first state indicating that a watchpoint is being formed for monitoring a branch instruction or a second state indicating that a watchpoint is being formed for a jump-and-link instruction; means for simultaneously generating a misprediction signal for each of a plurality of issued branch instructions including:means for receiving an evaluation condition code signal from a condition code select logic circuit; means for receiving a watchpoint condition signal from a watchpoint storage element; means for receiving a condition code type control signal from a watchpoint storage element; means for receiving an enable control signal from each execution result generation units; means for comparing said evaluation condition code signal with said watchpoint condition signal according to predetermined condition code evaluation rules including an asserted state of said enable control signal for each said execution result generation unit to evaluate whether the condition for the branch was correctly predicted; means for generating a branch true signal if said branch was correctly predicte; and means for simultaneously generating a jump-and-link misprediction signal for each of a plurality of issued jump-and-link instructions including: means for defining a target data structure having a plurality of storage locations for storing program counter data; means for writing an alternative next program counter to one of said storage locations when said jump-and-link instruction is issued and associating said stored alternative next program counter with said instruction; means for computing a computed next program counter value in an execution result generation units; means for receiving said computed next program counter from said execution result generation units; means for reading said stored alternative next program counter associated with said instruction from said storage location; means for comparing said alternative next program counter with said computed next program counter according to predetermined program counter comparison rules; means for generating a jump-and-link match signal when said comparison evaluates as true; and means for generating a jump-and-link true signal in response to a true state of both said jump-and-link match signal and said watchpoint jump-and-link signal; and means for generating an evaluation true signal in response to either a determination that said jump-and-link match signal is asserted or that said branch true signal is asserted; means for generating an evaluation ready signal in response to receipt of at least one source selection signal or receipt of an evaluation enable signal, said evaluation enable signal being generated in response to assertion of a watchpoint active signal, a watchpoint jump-and-link enable signal, a jump-and-link instruction execution completion signal, and a jump-and-link instruction checkpoint number signal; and means for generating an instruction misprediction signal in response to receipt of said evaluation ready signal and said evaluation true signal; means for generating a control-transfer-instruction issued signal from the issue unit for each control transfer instruction issued at the time it is issued; means for providing a watchpoint jump-and-link signal within said control-transfer-instruction issued signal to identify the instruction as a branch instruction or as a jump-and-link instruction; means for computing an alternative next program counter that specifies the target fetch program counter computed by a program control logic unit; means for generating a checkpoint write enable control signal and checkpoint write address for storing an alternate branch address in a storage location within said data structure; said write enable control signal being asserted when making a checkpoint; means for writing the watchpoint alternative next program counter into a storage unit at the checkpoint write address; means for determining the alternative next program counter during instruction decode of a predicted branch and a jump-and-link instruction, said watchpoint alternative next program counter sent to the Watchpoint Unit for a jump-and-link instruction including the predicted target fetch program counter and said watchpoint alternative next program counter sent to the Watchpoint Unit for a predicted branch instruction including the fetch program counter for the alternative branch direction; means for decoding said control transfer instruction issued signal in a field selection and write logic unit to determine the contents of selected information fields within said signal including determining whether the issued instruction is a branch instruction or a jump-and-link instruction, a first predetermined state in said JMPL field indicating that the instruction is a jump-link instruction and a second state in said JMPL filed indicating that said instruction is a branch instruction; and means for storing an information item for each branch instruction or jump-and-link instruction in a separate addressable storage location based on said indicia present in said control transfer instruction issued signal; wherein when said instruction is a branch instruction, said information item for said branch instruction comprises an alternative next program counter; and wherein when said instruction is a jump-and-link instruction, said information item for said jump-and-link instruction comprises a predicted target address; means for simultaneously storing, for each speculatively issued predicted instruction prior to execution of said instruction, an alternative path program instruction address designating the alternative execution path for said predicted instruction and a prediction information on which said predicted execution depends in a watchpoint element in a target address data structure defined in a memory unit within said CPU; means for simultaneously generating, upon completing execution of each said predicted instruction, signals indicating instruction execution completion status, identifying a watchpoint element number corresponding to said instruction in which pre-execution alternative path and prediction information is stored, and a calculated correct condition data value for comparing with said stored condition value and alternative program instruction address; means for simultaneously comparing said stored pre-execution alternative path and prediction information with said generated calculated condition data value for each said instruction and generating a match signal if the predicted condition data match said calculated correct condition data value for any of said instructions; means for simultaneously evaluating the prediction for each single instruction, including evaluating if a branch instruction or a jump-and-link instruction was correctly or incorrectly predicted and generating a mispredicted signal for each mispredicted instruction; means for prioritizing recovery of said CPU from said misprediction and selecting a particular high priority misprediction based on predetermined priority rules; means for identifying a checkpoint associated with said particular high priority mispredicted instruction and generating a CPU backup signal for recovering said processor from said particular mispredicted instruction; means for reading the altemative next program counter for said particular mispredicted instruction from said target address data structure; and means for sending said reed altemative next program address to an issue unit for restarting execution of said CPU based on said re-fetched instruction; means for separating data forward bus tag comparisons between a currently renamed condition-code tag in the current issue window cycle and a condition-code tag in previous cycle by the steps of: means for comparing the currently renamed condition-code tag in the current issue window signal to each data forward bus tag; and means for comparing previous cycle condition-code tag with each data forward bus tag; whereby said comparisons of said data forward bus tags with said condition code tags in the previous cycle and currently renamed condition code tags in the current issue window are performed more rapidly than if said comparisons were performed in a single non-split operation. 